Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

(between+ships)

Толкование Перевод

21 hold

I 1. [həuld] past tense, past participle - held; verb
1) (to have in one's hand(s) or between one's hands: He was holding a knife; Hold that dish with both hands; He held the little boy's hand; He held the mouse by its tail.) holde

2) (to have in a part, or between parts, of the body, or between parts of a tool etc: He held the pencil in his teeth; She was holding a pile of books in her arms; Hold the stamp with tweezers.) holde

3) (to support or keep from moving, running away, falling etc: What holds that shelf up?; He held the door closed by leaning against it; Hold your hands above your head; Hold his arms so that he can't struggle.) holde

4) (to remain in position, fixed etc when under strain: I've tied the two pieces of string together, but I'm not sure the knot will hold; Will the anchor hold in a storm?) holde

5) (to keep (a person) in some place or in one's power: The police are holding a man for questioning in connection with the murder; He was held captive.) holde

6) (to (be able to) contain: This jug holds two pints; You can't hold water in a handkerchief; This drawer holds all my shirts.) indeholde

7) (to cause to take place: The meeting will be held next week; We'll hold the meeting in the hall.) afholde

8) (to keep (oneself), or to be, in a particular state or condition: We'll hold ourselves in readiness in case you send for us; She holds herself very erect.) holde

9) (to have or be in (a job etc): He held the position of company secretary for five years.) have; være

10) (to think strongly; to believe; to consider or regard: I hold that this was the right decision; He holds me (to be) responsible for everyone's mistakes; He is held in great respect; He holds certain very odd beliefs.) tro; holde

11) (to continue to be valid or apply: Our offer will hold until next week; These rules hold under all circumstances.) gælde

12) ((with to) to force (a person) to do something he has promised to do: I intend to hold him to his promises.) holde nogen fast til noget

13) (to defend: They held the castle against the enemy.) holde; forsvare

14) (not to be beaten by: The general realized that the soldiers could not hold the enemy for long.) forsvare sig imod

15) (to keep (a person's attention): If you can't hold your pupils' attention, you can't be a good teacher.) holde; bevare

16) (to keep someone in a certain state: Don't hold us in suspense, what was the final decision?) holde hen

17) (to celebrate: The festival is held on 24 June.) fejre

18) (to be the owner of: He holds shares in this company.) eje

19) ((of good weather) to continue: I hope the weather holds until after the school sports.) holde

20) ((also hold the line) (of a person who is making a telephone call) to wait: Mr Brown is busy at the moment - will you hold or would you like him to call you back?) vente

21) (to continue to sing: Please hold that note for four whole beats.) holde

22) (to keep (something): They'll hold your luggage at the station until you collect it.) opbevare

23) ((of the future) to be going to produce: I wonder what the future holds for me?) bringe
2. noun
1) (the act of holding: He caught/got/laid/took hold of the rope and pulled; Keep hold of that rope.) hold; greb

2) (power; influence: He has a strange hold over that girl.) magt; indflydelse

3) ((in wrestling etc) a manner of holding one's opponent: The wrestler invented a new hold.) greb; tag

•

- - holder
- hold-all
- get hold of
- hold back
- hold down
- hold forth
- hold good
- hold it
- hold off
- hold on
- hold out
- hold one's own
- hold one's tongue
- hold up
- hold-up
- hold with II [həuld] noun
((in ships) the place, below the deck, where cargo is stored.) last

* * *
I 1. [həuld] past tense, past participle - held; verb
1) (to have in one's hand(s) or between one's hands: He was holding a knife; Hold that dish with both hands; He held the little boy's hand; He held the mouse by its tail.) holde

2) (to have in a part, or between parts, of the body, or between parts of a tool etc: He held the pencil in his teeth; She was holding a pile of books in her arms; Hold the stamp with tweezers.) holde

3) (to support or keep from moving, running away, falling etc: What holds that shelf up?; He held the door closed by leaning against it; Hold your hands above your head; Hold his arms so that he can't struggle.) holde

4) (to remain in position, fixed etc when under strain: I've tied the two pieces of string together, but I'm not sure the knot will hold; Will the anchor hold in a storm?) holde

5) (to keep (a person) in some place or in one's power: The police are holding a man for questioning in connection with the murder; He was held captive.) holde

6) (to (be able to) contain: This jug holds two pints; You can't hold water in a handkerchief; This drawer holds all my shirts.) indeholde

7) (to cause to take place: The meeting will be held next week; We'll hold the meeting in the hall.) afholde

8) (to keep (oneself), or to be, in a particular state or condition: We'll hold ourselves in readiness in case you send for us; She holds herself very erect.) holde

9) (to have or be in (a job etc): He held the position of company secretary for five years.) have; være

10) (to think strongly; to believe; to consider or regard: I hold that this was the right decision; He holds me (to be) responsible for everyone's mistakes; He is held in great respect; He holds certain very odd beliefs.) tro; holde

11) (to continue to be valid or apply: Our offer will hold until next week; These rules hold under all circumstances.) gælde

12) ((with to) to force (a person) to do something he has promised to do: I intend to hold him to his promises.) holde nogen fast til noget

13) (to defend: They held the castle against the enemy.) holde; forsvare

14) (not to be beaten by: The general realized that the soldiers could not hold the enemy for long.) forsvare sig imod

15) (to keep (a person's attention): If you can't hold your pupils' attention, you can't be a good teacher.) holde; bevare

16) (to keep someone in a certain state: Don't hold us in suspense, what was the final decision?) holde hen

17) (to celebrate: The festival is held on 24 June.) fejre

18) (to be the owner of: He holds shares in this company.) eje

19) ((of good weather) to continue: I hope the weather holds until after the school sports.) holde

20) ((also hold the line) (of a person who is making a telephone call) to wait: Mr Brown is busy at the moment - will you hold or would you like him to call you back?) vente

21) (to continue to sing: Please hold that note for four whole beats.) holde

22) (to keep (something): They'll hold your luggage at the station until you collect it.) opbevare

23) ((of the future) to be going to produce: I wonder what the future holds for me?) bringe
2. noun
1) (the act of holding: He caught/got/laid/took hold of the rope and pulled; Keep hold of that rope.) hold; greb

2) (power; influence: He has a strange hold over that girl.) magt; indflydelse

3) ((in wrestling etc) a manner of holding one's opponent: The wrestler invented a new hold.) greb; tag

•

- - holder
- hold-all
- get hold of
- hold back
- hold down
- hold forth
- hold good
- hold it
- hold off
- hold on
- hold out
- hold one's own
- hold one's tongue
- hold up
- hold-up
- hold with II [həuld] noun
((in ships) the place, below the deck, where cargo is stored.) last

English-Danish dictionary > hold
22 como

adv.

1 as.

lo he hecho como es debido I did it as o the way it should be done

me encanta como bailas I love the way you dance

lo hagamos como lo hagamos habrá problemas whichever way we do it there'll be problems

2 as.

como te decía ayer… as I was telling you yesterday…

3 as.

trabaja como bombero he works as a fireman

dieron el dinero como anticipo they gave the money as an advance

4 about (aproximadamente).

me quedan como mil pesos I've got about a thousand pesos left

estamos como a mitad de camino we're about half-way there

tiene un sabor como a naranja it tastes a bit like an orange

5 like, as, such as, qua.

6 how, in which way.

7 some.

Pesa como cien libras It weighs some hundred pounds.

conj.

1 as, since (ya que).

como no llegabas, nos fuimos as o since you didn't arrive, we left

2 if (si). (peninsular Spanish)

como no me hagas caso, lo pasarás mal if you don't listen to me, there will be trouble

3 that (que).

después de tantas veces como te lo he explicado after all the times (that) I've explained it to you

prep.

1 like, as, just like, such as.

Te di esto en condición de préstamo I gave this to you as a loan.

2 as to.

3 how to.

pres.indicat.

1^st person singular (yo) present indicative of spanish verb: comer.

* * *

como

► adverbio

1 (modo) how

■ así fue como nos encontramos this is how we met

■ lo hizo como quiso he did it the way he wanted to

2 (comparación) as, like

■ negro como la noche as dark as night

■ camina como su madre he walks like his mother

■ hablas como un político you talk like a politician

3 (en calidad de) as

■ como director as director

■ como invitado as a guest

4 (según) as

■ como dice tu amigo as your friend says

5 familiar (aproximadamente) about

■ había como unos cien there were about a hundred

► conjunción

1 (así que) as

■ como llegaban se presentaban they introduced themselves as they arrived

2 (si) if

■ como lo vuelvas a hacer... if you do it again...

3 (porque) as, since

■ como llegamos tarde no pudimos entrar since we arrived late we couldn't get in

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

como quiera que (no importa cómo) however 2 (ya que) since, as, inasmuch as

como no sea que unless

como sea whatever happens, no matter what

como si lo viera familiar I can imagine perfectly well

como si nada / como si tal cosa as if nothing had happened

hacer como quien to pretend to +inf

■ hizo como quien estaba enfermo he pretended to be ill

hacer como si to pretend to +inf

■ hace como si no viese nada he's pretending not to see anything

tanto como eso no familiar not as much as that

* * *
1. conj.
1) as

2) like

3) if

4) since, given that
2. prep.
as, like

* * *

1. ADV

1) [indicando semejanza] like

tienen un perro como el nuestro — they've got a dog like ours

se portó como un imbécil — he behaved like an idiot

es como un pez — it's like a fish

juega como yo — he plays like me o like I do

como este hay pocos — there are few like this o him

sabe como a queso — it tastes a bit like cheese

blanco como la nieve — as white as snow

tuvo resultados como no se habían conocido antes — it had results such as had never been known before

2) [introduciendo ejemplo] such as

hay peces, como truchas y salmones — there are fish, such as trout and salmon

tiene ventajas, como son la resistencia y durabilidad — it has advantages, such as o like strength and durability

3) [indicando modo]

a) + indic

lo hice como me habían enseñado — I did it as I had been taught

hazlo como te dijo ella — do it like * o the way she told you

toca como canta — she plays like * o the same way as she sings

no es como me lo imaginaba — it isn't as o like * I imagined it

prefiero como lo haces tú — I prefer it the way you do it

la manera como sucedió — the way (in which) it happened

fue así como comenzó — that was how it began

lo levanté como pude — I lifted it as best I could

• tal como, tal como lo había planeado — just as o the way I had planned it

b) + subjun

hazlo como quieras — do it however you want o like

hazlo como puedas — do your best, do the best you can

• como sea — at all costs

tratan de mantenerse en el poder como sea — they will do whatever it takes to stay in power

está decidido a salvar como sea la vida del niño — he's determined to do whatever it takes to save the child's life

sea como sea — in any case

hay que evitar que nos eliminen sea como sea — we must avoid getting knocked out at all costs

4) (=en calidad de) as

lo usé como cuchara — I used it as a spoon

asistió como espectador — he attended as a spectator

lo dice como juez — he says it speaking as a judge

vale más como poeta — he is better as a poet

5) (=más o menos) about, around

había como cincuenta — there were about o around fifty

vino como a las dos — he came at about o around two

sentía como tristeza — she felt a sort o kind of sadness

6) [con valor causal]

libre como estaba — free as he was

2. CONJ

1) + indic (=ya que) as, since

como no tenía dinero — as o since I had no money

2) + indic (=según) as

como dice mi profesor — as my teacher says

como se ve en el gráfico — as you can see from the diagram

• tal (y) como están las cosas — the way things are, as things stand

tal como están los precios de las motos... — with motorbike prices as they are at the moment...

3) + indic (=cuando) as soon as

así como nos vio lanzó un grito — as soon as he saw us he shouted

4) + indic
(=que)
verás como les ganamos — we'll beat them, you'll see

ya verás como no vienen — I bet they won't come

• de tanto como, tienen las manos doloridas de tanto como aplaudieron — they clapped so much their hands hurt

de tanto como odio a los dos, no sé a quien odio más — I hate them both so much, I don't know which I hate the most

5) + subjun (=si) if

como vengas tarde, no comes — if you're late you'll get nothing to eat

como sea cierto, ¡estamos perdidos! — if it's true, we're done for!

¡como lo pierdas! — you'd better not lose it!, don't you lose it!

• como no, como no lo haga en seguida... — if he doesn't do it at once..., unless he does it at once...

no salimos, como no sea para ir al cine — we only go out if it's to go to the cinema, we don't go out unless it's to go to the cinema

6)

• como que — as if

¡como que yo soy tonto y me creo esas mentiras! — as if I was stupid enough to believe lies like that!

¡como que te van a pagar! — don't tell me they're going to pay you!

hizo como que no nos veía — he pretended not to see us

al tragar nota como que le molesta — he shows discomfort when swallowing

7)

• como si — as if, as though

siguió leyendo, como si no hubiera oído nada — he kept on reading, as if o as though he hadn't heard

sentí como si fuera a caerme — I felt as if o as though I was about to fall

como si no hubiera pasado nada — as if o as though nothing had happened

se comporta como si me odiara — he behaves as if o as though he hated me

como si fuera a llover — as if o as though it was going to rain

8)

• como para, ¡es como para denunciarlos! — it's enough to make you want to report them to the police!

tampoco es como para enfadarse tanto — there's no need to get so angry about it

9) CAm, Méx

a como dé o diera lugar — at any cost
así 1., 5), pronto 1., 4), querer 2., 1)
* * *
I
preposición

1)

a) ( en calidad de) as

quiero hablarte como amigo — I want to speak to you as a friend

el director tendrá como funciones... — the director's duties will be...

está considerado como lo mejor — he's considered (to be) the best

b) ( con el nombre de) as

se la conoce como `flor de luz' — it's known as `flor de luz'

c) ( por ejemplo) like

en algunos lugares como Londres — in some places such as o like London

2) (en comparaciones, contrastes) like

uno como el tuyo — one like yours

pienso como tú — I agree with you

fue ella, como que me llamo Beatriz — it was her, as sure as my name's Beatriz

bailó como nunca — she danced as o like she'd never danced before

me trata como a un imbécil — he treats me like an idiot

no hay nada como un buen coñac! — there's nothing like a good brandy!

como para + inf: es como para echarse a llorar it's enough to make you want to cry; fue como para pegarle — I could have hit him

3) (en locs)

así como — (frml) as well as

como él solo/ella sola: es egoísta como él solo he's so o he's incredibly selfish!; como mucho/poco at (the) most/at least; como nadie: cocina como nadie nobody cooks like her; como que...: conduce muy bien - como que es piloto de carreras he drives very well - well, he is a racing driver, after all; y no me lo dijiste - como que no lo sabía! and you didn't tell me about it - that's because I didn't know about it!; como ser (CS) such as, for example; como si (+ subj) as if, as though; ella está grave y él como si nada or como si tal cosa — she's seriously ill and he doesn't seem at all o in the least worried
II
conjunción

1) ( de la manera que) as

tal como había prometido — just as he had promised

como era de esperar — as was to be expected

como dice el refrán — as the saying goes

no me gustó como lo dijo — I didn't like the way she said it

(tal y) como están las cosas — as things stand; (+ subj)

hazlo como quieras/como puedas — do it any way you like/as best as you can

no voy - como quieras — I'm not going - please yourself o as you like

como quiera que sea — no matter what

la buganvilla, o como quiera que se llame — bougainvillea or whatever it's called

2) ( puesto que) as, since

como era temprano, nos fuimos a dar una vuelta — since o as it was early, we went for a walk

3) (si) (+ subj) if

como te pille... — if I catch you...

4) ( en oraciones concesivas)

cansado como estaba, me ayudó — tired though o tired as he was, he helped me

5) ( que)

vimos como se los llevaban — we saw them being taken away

vas a ver como llega tarde — he'll be late, you'll see
III
adverbio

1) ( expresando aproximación) about

está como a cincuenta kilómetros — it's about fifty kilometers away

un sabor como a almendras — a kind of almondy taste

2) ( uso expletivo) kind of (colloq)

me da como vergüenza... — I find it kind of embarrassing...

* * *

= as, by way of, for the purpose of + Nombre, how, in the guise of, just as, like, qua, much as, as a kind of, as serving as, along the lines of, in + Posesivo + capacity as, such as, kind of like.

Ex. This scheme aims for a more helpful order than the major schemes, by following the groupings of subjects as they are taught in schools.

Ex. An annotation is a note added to the title and/or other bibliographic information concerning a document, by way of comment or explanation.

Ex. Taking the second situation for the purpose of illustration, there are four options for choice of title.

Ex. Inevitably any abridgement poses the dilemma how to abridge, that is, what to leave out and what to include.

Ex. Further, these indexers are probably so familiar with their subject area that, they whether in the guise of indexer or searcher, will profit little from any additional guides to relationships.

Ex. Just as Ivan finds that by taking pleasure in an extra piece of food he makes survival possible and beats Stalin and his jailors at heir own game.

Ex. Thus, the computer-held term record files are most suitable for applications like Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) systems.

Ex. Such a concept came as a great surprise to many information educators who rather dismissively regarded the information qua information field of activity as being too limited.

Ex. More studies are needed to identify the full temporal effects of the personal computer, much as they did for television.

Ex. In a way, it is acting as a kind of bridge between the two, permitting traffic both ways where once there was a divide.

Ex. 45 libraries have been unofficially recognised by librarians as serving as model children's libraries.

Ex. The author considers the possibility of a shift from libraries to personal information service along the lines of the shift that has occured from public to private transport.

Ex. Strange that so helpful and charming a person in his capacity as a librarian could behave so monstrously; but behave thus he did.

Ex. Indicative abstracts abound in phrases such as 'is discussed' or 'has been surveyed', but do not record the outcome of the discussion or survey.

Ex. It's kind of like trumping in public -- You simply do not do it!.

----

* ¡cómo se nota que no está el jefe! = while the cat's away, the mice will play.

* aducir como evidencia = adduce as + evidence.

* algo así como = something like.

* añádase cómo = expand like.

* así como = as, as well as.

* así como así = just like that.

* así como... de igual modo... = just as... so....

* así es como = this is how.

* así es como es = that's how it is.

* caer como moscas = drop like + flies.

* como aclaración = in parenthesis.

* como algo natural = as a matter of course.

* como algo normal = as a matter of course.

* como algo opuesto a = as against.

* como algo residual = residually.

* como alternativa = as an alternative.

* como anillo al dedo = just the ticket, the right twigs for an eagle's nest, perfect fit, perfect match, that's the ticket!.

* como antes = as before.

* como apoyo a = in support of.

* como barcos que se cruzan (en la noche) = like passing ships (in the night).

* como barcos que se cruzan (en la oscuridad) = like passing ships (in the night).

* como base para = as a basis for.

* como cabe esperar = unsurprisingly, as one might expect, as expected.

* como cabía esperar = as expected.

* como cabría esperar = as might be expected, as one might expect.

* como cabría suponer = as might be expected.

* como consecuencia = on this basis, on that basis, in doing so, in consequence, in accordance.

* como consecuencia (de) = as a result (of), in the wake of, as a consequence (of).

* cómo conseguir = obtainability.

* como con todo en la vida = as with everything in life.

* como contrapartida = in return.

* como cooperativa = collegially.

* como corresponde = fittingly.

* como corresponde a = as befits.

* como cuando + Indicativo = as in + Gerundio.

* como de costumbre = as usual, as always, according to normal practice.

* cómo demonios = how on earth.

* como dice el dicho = as the saying goes, so the saying goes.

* como dice el refrán = as the saying goes, so the saying goes.

* como diferente a = as distinct from.

* cómo disponer de (algo) = disposition.

* como dos gotas de agua = as alike as two peas in a pod, like two peas in a pod.

* como ejemplo = as an example, by way of illustration.

* como el cuero = leathery.

* como el desierto = desert-like.

* como el día y la noche = worlds apart, like oil and water, like chalk and cheese, like apples and oranges.

* como el fuego = like wildfire.

* como el perro del hortelano que ni come ni deja comer = a dog in the manger.

* como en casa = like home (away) from home.

* como en casa no se está en ningún sitio = there's no place like home.

* como en el caso de = as with, just as for, as in the case of.

* como era de esperar = as expected.

* como es debido = fittingly.

* como es de esperar = predictably, not surprisingly, as expected.

* como es el caso de = as it is with, as with.

* como es habitual = as always.

* como es natural = not unnaturally.

* como es normal = as always.

* como esto = like this.

* como fecha final = at the very latest.

* como forma de vida = as a way of life.

* como grogui = drowsily, groggily.

* como grupo = collectively.

* como guía = for guidance.

* como la noche y el día = like oil and water, worlds apart, like chalk and cheese, like apples and oranges.

* como la pólvora = like wildfire.

* como las ardillas = squirrel-like.

* como las empresas = business-like.

* como loca = like a madwoman.

* como loco = like hell, like crazy, like mad, like a lunatic, like a madman.

* como medida de seguridad = as a backup.

* como medida provisional = as an interim measure.

* como medida temporal = as an interim measure.

* como medida transitoria = as an interim measure.

* como mejor + poder = as best + Pronombre + can.

* como mínimo = at least, conservatively, at a minimum.

* como mínimo hasta que = minimally until.

* como mucho = at best, at most, if at all, at the most, at the very latest.

* como muestra de agradecimiento = as a token of thanks.

* como muestra de + Posesivo + agradecimiento = as a token of + Posesivo + appreciation.

* como muestra de + Posesivo + gratitud = as a token of + Posesivo + gratitude.

* como muy tarde = at the latest.

* como norma = as a rule, as a matter of policy.

* como norma general = as a rule of thumb, as a general rule, as a general rule of thumb, as a rough guide.

* cómo nos las ingeniamos para... = how in the world....

* como nota al margen = on a sidenote.

* como nuevo = in mint condition, in tip-top condition, in tip-top form.

* como ocurre en estos casos = as is the way with these things.

* como + ocurrir + en el caso de = as + be + the case for.

* como opuesto a = as distinct from, as opposed to.

* como otra posibilidad = as an alternative.

* ¡como para creérselo! = Posesivo + famous last words.

* como parásito = parasitically.

* como persona que = as one who.

* como pez fuera del agua = like a fish out of water.

* como polo opuesto = by polar contrast.

* como por arte de magia = magically, into thin air.

* como por ejemplo = such as, to the effect of.

* como por encanto = magically.

* como poseído = as one possessed.

* como preámbulo de = as a preamble to.

* como primera elección = as a first preference.

* como prueba de = as a token of, as a sign of.

* como prueba de agradecimiento = as a token of thanks.

* como prueba de + Posesivo + agradecimiento = as a token of + Posesivo + appreciation.

* como prueba de + Posesivo + gratitud = as a token of + Posesivo + gratitude.

* como pruebas = in evidence, in evidence.

* como quiera que + Verbo = however + Verbo.

* como quieras llamarlo = whatever you call it.

* como reconocimiento a = in recognition of.

* como respuesta a = in reply to, in response to.

* como resultado = in consequence, on this basis, on that basis, in doing so.

* como resultado (de) = as a consequence (of).

* como salido de fábrica = in mint condition.

* como segunda alternativa = as a backup.

* como se indicó en = as was pointed out in.

* como señal de agradecimiento = as a token of thanks.

* como señal de + Posesivo + agradecimiento = as a token of + Posesivo + appreciation.

* como señal de + Posesivo + gratitud = as a token of + Posesivo + gratitude.

* cómo + ser = what + be like.

* como si = as though.

* como si dijéramos = as it were.

* como siempre = as always.

* como si fuese = as it were.

* como siga así = at this rate.

* como sigue = as follows.

* como símbolo de = as a token of, as a sign of.

* como si nada = be right as rain, unfazed.

* como si no hubiera mañana = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si + Pronombre + fuese la vida en ello = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si se acabara el mundo = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si se fuese a acabar el mundo = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si se + Pronombre + hubiera tragado la tierra = into thin air.

* como si (se tratase de) = as if.

* como si tal cosa = be right as rain, unfazed, just like that.

* como sustituto de = in place of.

* como tal = as such, in this capacity, qua.

* como término medio = on average.

* como todo un caballero = sportingly.

* como último recurso = as a last resort, in the last resort.

* como una aguja en un pajar = like a needle in a haystack.

* como una balsa de aceite = like a millpond, calm like a millpond.

* como una cabra = stark raving mad, raving mad.

* como una cebolla = onion-like.

* como una condenada = like a madwoman.

* como una descosida = like a madwoman.

* como una forma de = as a means of.

* como una metralladora = quick-fire.

* como un basilisco = like a bear with a sore head.

* como un bobo = stupidly.

* como un bólido = like the clappers.

* como un campo de batalla = like a war zone.

* como un cencerro = barking mad, raving mad, stark raving mad.

* como un condenado = like the clappers, like crazy, like mad, like a lunatic, like a madman, as one possessed.

* como un descosido = like a lunatic, like a madman, as one possessed.

* como un detective = detectivelike, sleuthlike.

* como un elefante en una cacharrería = like an elephant in a china shop.

* como un energúmeno = like a bear with a sore head.

* como un estúpido = stupidly.

* como un experto = expertly.

* como un glaciar = glacially.

* como unidad global = as a whole.

* como un idiota = stupidly.

* como un loca = like a madwoman.

* como un loco = like crazy, like mad, like a lunatic, madly, like a madman.

* como un método para = as a means of.

* como un modo de = as a way of.

* como un necio = stupidly.

* como un observador que pasa desapercibido = fly-on-the-wall, fly-on-the-wall.

* cómo uno se identifica a sí mismo = self-identification.

* como un platillo = saucer-like.

* como un poseído = as one possessed.

* como un rayo = in a flash.

* como un reguero de pólvora = like wildfire.

* como un relámpago = like greased lightning, like the clappers.

* como un reloj = as regular as clockwork, like clockwork.

* como un televisor = television-type.

* como un todo = as a whole.

* como un tonto = stupidly, foolishly.

* como un torpe = foolishly.

* como un zombi = zombielike.

* como vivir en un escaparate = like being in a (gold)fish bowl.

* como + Voz Pasiva = as + Participio Pasado.

* como y cuando = as and when.

* como y cuando sea + Adjetivo = as + Adjetivo.

* comportarse como se espera = be a sport.

* con el mismo + Nombre + como el que... = as + Adverbio + as....

* conocerse como = be known as.

* dar como resultado = result (in).

* de cómo = as to how.

* durante tanto tiempo como sea posible = for as long as possible.

* el modo como = the way in which.

* el problema no es el qué, sino el cómo = the devil (is/lives) in the details.

* frase como encabezamiento = phrase heading.

* llegar a ser conocido como = become + known as.

* mantenerse como válido = hold up.

* nada menos que + Nombre + tan + Adjetivo + como = no less + Adjetivo + Nombre + than.

* no + haber + nada como = there + be + nothing like.

* ofrecerse como voluntario = volunteer.

* para colmo = on top of everything else.

* plan de cómo disponer de Algo = disposition instruction.

* proponer como principio = posit.

* sea como sea = be that as it may, at all costs, at any cost.

* seleccionar como relevante = hit.

* ser como hablar con la pared = be like talking to a brick wall.

* ser tan buen momento como cualquier otro = be as good a time as any.

* ser un momento tan bueno como cualquier otro = be as good a time as any.

* tal como = such as, such + Nombre + as, just as.

* tal y como aparece = as it/they stand(s).

* tal y como es/son = as it/they stand(s).

* tal y como + ser = in + Posesivo + true colours.

* tan + Adjetivo + como = as + Adjetivo + as, every bit as + Adjetivo + as.

* tan + Adjetivo + como de costumbre = as + Adjetivo + as ever.

* tan + Adjetivo + como siempre = as + Adjetivo + as ever.

* tan pronto como = as soon as, just as soon as, no sooner... than.

* tan pronto como sea posible = as soon as possible (asap).

* tanto como = as many... as..., as much as + Adjetivo, both... and..., no less than, equally, if not, so much as.

* tanto como siempre = as much as ever.

* tener como equivalente = have + counterpart.

* tener como motivo central = plan around + Nombre.

* tener como objetivo = have + as + Posesivo + objective.

* tomar como ejemplo = take.

* un poco como = kind of like.

* * *
I
preposición

1)

a) ( en calidad de) as

quiero hablarte como amigo — I want to speak to you as a friend

el director tendrá como funciones... — the director's duties will be...

está considerado como lo mejor — he's considered (to be) the best

b) ( con el nombre de) as

se la conoce como `flor de luz' — it's known as `flor de luz'

c) ( por ejemplo) like

en algunos lugares como Londres — in some places such as o like London

2) (en comparaciones, contrastes) like

uno como el tuyo — one like yours

pienso como tú — I agree with you

fue ella, como que me llamo Beatriz — it was her, as sure as my name's Beatriz

bailó como nunca — she danced as o like she'd never danced before

me trata como a un imbécil — he treats me like an idiot

no hay nada como un buen coñac! — there's nothing like a good brandy!

como para + inf: es como para echarse a llorar it's enough to make you want to cry; fue como para pegarle — I could have hit him

3) (en locs)

así como — (frml) as well as

como él solo/ella sola: es egoísta como él solo he's so o he's incredibly selfish!; como mucho/poco at (the) most/at least; como nadie: cocina como nadie nobody cooks like her; como que...: conduce muy bien - como que es piloto de carreras he drives very well - well, he is a racing driver, after all; y no me lo dijiste - como que no lo sabía! and you didn't tell me about it - that's because I didn't know about it!; como ser (CS) such as, for example; como si (+ subj) as if, as though; ella está grave y él como si nada or como si tal cosa — she's seriously ill and he doesn't seem at all o in the least worried
II
conjunción

1) ( de la manera que) as

tal como había prometido — just as he had promised

como era de esperar — as was to be expected

como dice el refrán — as the saying goes

no me gustó como lo dijo — I didn't like the way she said it

(tal y) como están las cosas — as things stand; (+ subj)

hazlo como quieras/como puedas — do it any way you like/as best as you can

no voy - como quieras — I'm not going - please yourself o as you like

como quiera que sea — no matter what

la buganvilla, o como quiera que se llame — bougainvillea or whatever it's called

2) ( puesto que) as, since

como era temprano, nos fuimos a dar una vuelta — since o as it was early, we went for a walk

3) (si) (+ subj) if

como te pille... — if I catch you...

4) ( en oraciones concesivas)

cansado como estaba, me ayudó — tired though o tired as he was, he helped me

5) ( que)

vimos como se los llevaban — we saw them being taken away

vas a ver como llega tarde — he'll be late, you'll see
III
adverbio

1) ( expresando aproximación) about

está como a cincuenta kilómetros — it's about fifty kilometers away

un sabor como a almendras — a kind of almondy taste

2) ( uso expletivo) kind of (colloq)

me da como vergüenza... — I find it kind of embarrassing...

* * *

= as, by way of, for the purpose of + Nombre, how, in the guise of, just as, like, qua, much as, as a kind of, as serving as, along the lines of, in + Posesivo + capacity as, such as, kind of like.

Ex: This scheme aims for a more helpful order than the major schemes, by following the groupings of subjects as they are taught in schools.

Ex: An annotation is a note added to the title and/or other bibliographic information concerning a document, by way of comment or explanation.

Ex: Taking the second situation for the purpose of illustration, there are four options for choice of title.

Ex: Inevitably any abridgement poses the dilemma how to abridge, that is, what to leave out and what to include.

Ex: Further, these indexers are probably so familiar with their subject area that, they whether in the guise of indexer or searcher, will profit little from any additional guides to relationships.

Ex: Just as Ivan finds that by taking pleasure in an extra piece of food he makes survival possible and beats Stalin and his jailors at heir own game.

Ex: Thus, the computer-held term record files are most suitable for applications like Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) systems.

Ex: Such a concept came as a great surprise to many information educators who rather dismissively regarded the information qua information field of activity as being too limited.

Ex: More studies are needed to identify the full temporal effects of the personal computer, much as they did for television.

Ex: In a way, it is acting as a kind of bridge between the two, permitting traffic both ways where once there was a divide.

Ex: 45 libraries have been unofficially recognised by librarians as serving as model children's libraries.

Ex: The author considers the possibility of a shift from libraries to personal information service along the lines of the shift that has occured from public to private transport.

Ex: Strange that so helpful and charming a person in his capacity as a librarian could behave so monstrously; but behave thus he did.

Ex: Indicative abstracts abound in phrases such as 'is discussed' or 'has been surveyed', but do not record the outcome of the discussion or survey.

Ex: It's kind of like trumping in public -- You simply do not do it!.

* ¡cómo se nota que no está el jefe! = while the cat's away, the mice will play.

* aducir como evidencia = adduce as + evidence.

* algo así como = something like.

* añádase cómo = expand like.

* así como = as, as well as.

* así como así = just like that.

* así como... de igual modo... = just as... so....

* así es como = this is how.

* así es como es = that's how it is.

* caer como moscas = drop like + flies.

* como aclaración = in parenthesis.

* como algo natural = as a matter of course.

* como algo normal = as a matter of course.

* como algo opuesto a = as against.

* como algo residual = residually.

* como alternativa = as an alternative.

* como anillo al dedo = just the ticket, the right twigs for an eagle's nest, perfect fit, perfect match, that's the ticket!.

* como antes = as before.

* como apoyo a = in support of.

* como barcos que se cruzan (en la noche) = like passing ships (in the night).

* como barcos que se cruzan (en la oscuridad) = like passing ships (in the night).

* como base para = as a basis for.

* como cabe esperar = unsurprisingly, as one might expect, as expected.

* como cabía esperar = as expected.

* como cabría esperar = as might be expected, as one might expect.

* como cabría suponer = as might be expected.

* como consecuencia = on this basis, on that basis, in doing so, in consequence, in accordance.

* como consecuencia (de) = as a result (of), in the wake of, as a consequence (of).

* cómo conseguir = obtainability.

* como con todo en la vida = as with everything in life.

* como contrapartida = in return.

* como cooperativa = collegially.

* como corresponde = fittingly.

* como corresponde a = as befits.

* como cuando + Indicativo = as in + Gerundio.

* como de costumbre = as usual, as always, according to normal practice.

* cómo demonios = how on earth.

* como dice el dicho = as the saying goes, so the saying goes.

* como dice el refrán = as the saying goes, so the saying goes.

* como diferente a = as distinct from.

* cómo disponer de (algo) = disposition.

* como dos gotas de agua = as alike as two peas in a pod, like two peas in a pod.

* como ejemplo = as an example, by way of illustration.

* como el cuero = leathery.

* como el desierto = desert-like.

* como el día y la noche = worlds apart, like oil and water, like chalk and cheese, like apples and oranges.

* como el fuego = like wildfire.

* como el perro del hortelano que ni come ni deja comer = a dog in the manger.

* como en casa = like home (away) from home.

* como en casa no se está en ningún sitio = there's no place like home.

* como en el caso de = as with, just as for, as in the case of.

* como era de esperar = as expected.

* como es debido = fittingly.

* como es de esperar = predictably, not surprisingly, as expected.

* como es el caso de = as it is with, as with.

* como es habitual = as always.

* como es natural = not unnaturally.

* como es normal = as always.

* como esto = like this.

* como fecha final = at the very latest.

* como forma de vida = as a way of life.

* como grogui = drowsily, groggily.

* como grupo = collectively.

* como guía = for guidance.

* como la noche y el día = like oil and water, worlds apart, like chalk and cheese, like apples and oranges.

* como la pólvora = like wildfire.

* como las ardillas = squirrel-like.

* como las empresas = business-like.

* como loca = like a madwoman.

* como loco = like hell, like crazy, like mad, like a lunatic, like a madman.

* como medida de seguridad = as a backup.

* como medida provisional = as an interim measure.

* como medida temporal = as an interim measure.

* como medida transitoria = as an interim measure.

* como mejor + poder = as best + Pronombre + can.

* como mínimo = at least, conservatively, at a minimum.

* como mínimo hasta que = minimally until.

* como mucho = at best, at most, if at all, at the most, at the very latest.

* como muestra de agradecimiento = as a token of thanks.

* como muestra de + Posesivo + agradecimiento = as a token of + Posesivo + appreciation.

* como muestra de + Posesivo + gratitud = as a token of + Posesivo + gratitude.

* como muy tarde = at the latest.

* como norma = as a rule, as a matter of policy.

* como norma general = as a rule of thumb, as a general rule, as a general rule of thumb, as a rough guide.

* cómo nos las ingeniamos para... = how in the world....

* como nota al margen = on a sidenote.

* como nuevo = in mint condition, in tip-top condition, in tip-top form.

* como ocurre en estos casos = as is the way with these things.

* como + ocurrir + en el caso de = as + be + the case for.

* como opuesto a = as distinct from, as opposed to.

* como otra posibilidad = as an alternative.

* ¡como para creérselo! = Posesivo + famous last words.

* como parásito = parasitically.

* como persona que = as one who.

* como pez fuera del agua = like a fish out of water.

* como polo opuesto = by polar contrast.

* como por arte de magia = magically, into thin air.

* como por ejemplo = such as, to the effect of.

* como por encanto = magically.

* como poseído = as one possessed.

* como preámbulo de = as a preamble to.

* como primera elección = as a first preference.

* como prueba de = as a token of, as a sign of.

* como prueba de agradecimiento = as a token of thanks.

* como prueba de + Posesivo + agradecimiento = as a token of + Posesivo + appreciation.

* como prueba de + Posesivo + gratitud = as a token of + Posesivo + gratitude.

* como pruebas = in evidence, in evidence.

* como quiera que + Verbo = however + Verbo.

* como quieras llamarlo = whatever you call it.

* como reconocimiento a = in recognition of.

* como respuesta a = in reply to, in response to.

* como resultado = in consequence, on this basis, on that basis, in doing so.

* como resultado (de) = as a consequence (of).

* como salido de fábrica = in mint condition.

* como segunda alternativa = as a backup.

* como se indicó en = as was pointed out in.

* como señal de agradecimiento = as a token of thanks.

* como señal de + Posesivo + agradecimiento = as a token of + Posesivo + appreciation.

* como señal de + Posesivo + gratitud = as a token of + Posesivo + gratitude.

* cómo + ser = what + be like.

* como si = as though.

* como si dijéramos = as it were.

* como siempre = as always.

* como si fuese = as it were.

* como siga así = at this rate.

* como sigue = as follows.

* como símbolo de = as a token of, as a sign of.

* como si nada = be right as rain, unfazed.

* como si no hubiera mañana = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si + Pronombre + fuese la vida en ello = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si se acabara el mundo = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si se fuese a acabar el mundo = like there's no tomorrow.

* como si se + Pronombre + hubiera tragado la tierra = into thin air.

* como si (se tratase de) = as if.

* como si tal cosa = be right as rain, unfazed, just like that.

* como sustituto de = in place of.

* como tal = as such, in this capacity, qua.

* como término medio = on average.

* como todo un caballero = sportingly.

* como último recurso = as a last resort, in the last resort.

* como una aguja en un pajar = like a needle in a haystack.

* como una balsa de aceite = like a millpond, calm like a millpond.

* como una cabra = stark raving mad, raving mad.

* como una cebolla = onion-like.

* como una condenada = like a madwoman.

* como una descosida = like a madwoman.

* como una forma de = as a means of.

* como una metralladora = quick-fire.

* como un basilisco = like a bear with a sore head.

* como un bobo = stupidly.

* como un bólido = like the clappers.

* como un campo de batalla = like a war zone.

* como un cencerro = barking mad, raving mad, stark raving mad.

* como un condenado = like the clappers, like crazy, like mad, like a lunatic, like a madman, as one possessed.

* como un descosido = like a lunatic, like a madman, as one possessed.

* como un detective = detectivelike, sleuthlike.

* como un elefante en una cacharrería = like an elephant in a china shop.

* como un energúmeno = like a bear with a sore head.

* como un estúpido = stupidly.

* como un experto = expertly.

* como un glaciar = glacially.

* como unidad global = as a whole.

* como un idiota = stupidly.

* como un loca = like a madwoman.

* como un loco = like crazy, like mad, like a lunatic, madly, like a madman.

* como un método para = as a means of.

* como un modo de = as a way of.

* como un necio = stupidly.

* como un observador que pasa desapercibido = fly-on-the-wall, fly-on-the-wall.

* cómo uno se identifica a sí mismo = self-identification.

* como un platillo = saucer-like.

* como un poseído = as one possessed.

* como un rayo = in a flash.

* como un reguero de pólvora = like wildfire.

* como un relámpago = like greased lightning, like the clappers.

* como un reloj = as regular as clockwork, like clockwork.

* como un televisor = television-type.

* como un todo = as a whole.

* como un tonto = stupidly, foolishly.

* como un torpe = foolishly.

* como un zombi = zombielike.

* como vivir en un escaparate = like being in a (gold)fish bowl.

* como + Voz Pasiva = as + Participio Pasado.

* como y cuando = as and when.

* como y cuando sea + Adjetivo = as + Adjetivo.

* comportarse como se espera = be a sport.

* con el mismo + Nombre + como el que... = as + Adverbio + as....

* conocerse como = be known as.

* dar como resultado = result (in).

* de cómo = as to how.

* durante tanto tiempo como sea posible = for as long as possible.

* el modo como = the way in which.

* el problema no es el qué, sino el cómo = the devil (is/lives) in the details.

* frase como encabezamiento = phrase heading.

* llegar a ser conocido como = become + known as.

* mantenerse como válido = hold up.

* nada menos que + Nombre + tan + Adjetivo + como = no less + Adjetivo + Nombre + than.

* no + haber + nada como = there + be + nothing like.

* ofrecerse como voluntario = volunteer.

* para colmo = on top of everything else.

* plan de cómo disponer de Algo = disposition instruction.

* proponer como principio = posit.

* sea como sea = be that as it may, at all costs, at any cost.

* seleccionar como relevante = hit.

* ser como hablar con la pared = be like talking to a brick wall.

* ser tan buen momento como cualquier otro = be as good a time as any.

* ser un momento tan bueno como cualquier otro = be as good a time as any.

* tal como = such as, such + Nombre + as, just as.

* tal y como aparece = as it/they stand(s).

* tal y como es/son = as it/they stand(s).

* tal y como + ser = in + Posesivo + true colours.

* tan + Adjetivo + como = as + Adjetivo + as, every bit as + Adjetivo + as.

* tan + Adjetivo + como de costumbre = as + Adjetivo + as ever.

* tan + Adjetivo + como siempre = as + Adjetivo + as ever.

* tan pronto como = as soon as, just as soon as, no sooner... than.

* tan pronto como sea posible = as soon as possible (asap).

* tanto como = as many... as..., as much as + Adjetivo, both... and..., no less than, equally, if not, so much as.

* tanto como siempre = as much as ever.

* tener como equivalente = have + counterpart.

* tener como motivo central = plan around + Nombre.

* tener como objetivo = have + as + Posesivo + objective.

* tomar como ejemplo = take.

* un poco como = kind of like.

* * *

como¹

prep

A

1 (en calidad de) as

usando el paraguas como bastón using his umbrella as a walking stick

quiero hablarte como amigo y no como abogado I want to speak to you as a friend and not as a lawyer

el director tendrá como funciones … the director's duties will be …

está considerado como lo mejor he's considered (to be) the best

lo presentó como su ex-marido she introduced him as her ex-husband

2 (con el nombre de) as

la flor conocida allí como `Santa Rita' the flower known there as `Santa Rita'

3 (por ejemplo) like

en algunas capitales como Londres in some capital cities such as London o like London

necesitamos a alguien como tú we need someone like you

tengo ganas de comer algo dulce — ¿como qué? I fancy something sweet — like what?

B (en comparaciones, contrastes) like

quiero un vestido como el tuyo I want a dress like yours

pienso como tú I agree with you

fue ella, como que me llamo Beatriz it was her, as sure as my name's Beatriz

se portó como un caballero he behaved like a gentleman

la quiero como a una hija I love her like a daughter o as if she were my own daughter

bailó como nunca she danced as o like she'd never danced before

me trata como a un imbécil he treats me like an idiot o as if I were an idiot

se llama algo así como Genaro o Gerardo he's called something like Genaro or Gerardo

¡no hay nada como un buen coñac! there's nothing like a good brandy!

era verde, un verde como el de la alfombra de la oficina it was green, the color of the office carpet

como PARA + INF:

es como para echarse a llorar it's enough to make you want to cry, it makes you want to cry

C ( en locs):

así como ( frml); as well as

por esto, así como por muchas otras razones because of this, and for many other reasons as well o as well as for many other reasons

sus abundantes recursos naturales, así como su importancia estratégica its abundant natural resources, together with o as well as its strategic importance

como él solo/ella sola: es egoísta como él solo he's so o he's incredibly selfish!

como mucho at (the) most, at the outside

como poco at least

como nadie: hace la paella como nadie she makes wonderful paella, nobody makes paella like her

como que …: conduce muy bien — como que es piloto de carreras he drives very well — well, he is a racing driver, after all

le voy a decir cuatro cosas — sí, sí, como que te vas a atrever … I'm going to give him a piece of my mind — oh, yes? I'll believe that when I see it

y no me lo dijiste — ¡como que no sabía nada! and you didn't tell me about it — that's because I didn't know anything about it myself!

como ser (CS); such as, for example, like

como si (+ subj) as if, as though

actuó como si no le importara she acted as if o as though she didn't care

ella está grave y él como si nada or como si tal cosa she's seriously ill and he doesn't seem at all worried o he behaves as if it's nothing (to worry about)

él como si nada or como si tal cosa, ni se inmutó he just stood there without batting an eyelid

como²

conjunction

A (de la manera que) as

no me gustó el modo or la manera como lo dijo I didn't like the way she said it

llegó temprano, tal como había prometido he arrived early, just as he had promised

ganó Raúl, como era de esperar Raúl won, as was to be expected

así en la tierra como en el cielo on Earth as it is in Heaven

como dice el refrán as the saying goes

(tal y) como están las cosas as things stand, the way things are

(+ subj): hazlo como quieras do it any way you like o how you like

no voy — como quieras I'm not going — please yourself o as you like

me dijo que me las arreglara como pudiera he told me to sort things as best I could

la buganvilla, o como quiera que se llame bougainvillea or whatever it's called

como quiera que sea, ellos se llevaron la copa anyway, the point is they won the cup

B (puesto que) as, since

como todavía era temprano, nos fuimos a dar una vuelta since o as it was still early, we went for a walk, it was still early so we went for a walk

C (+ subj) (si) if

como te vuelva a encontrar por aquí if I catch you around here again

D

(en oraciones concesivas): cansado como estaba, se ofreció a ayudarme tired though o tired as he was, he offered to help me

joven como es, tiene más sentido común que tú he may be young but he has more common sense than you

E

(que): vimos como se los llevaban en una furgoneta we saw them being taken away in a van, we saw how they were taken away in a van

vas a ver como llega tarde he'll be late, you'll see

como³

adverb

A (expresando aproximación) about

como a la mitad del camino about half way there

está como a cincuenta kilómetros it's about fifty kilometers away

vino como a las seis she came at around o about six

tiene un sabor como a almendras it has a kind of almondy taste, it tastes something like o a bit like almonds

un ruido como de un motor a noise like that of an engine

B (uso expletivo) kind of ( colloq)

es que me da como vergüenza … I find it kind of embarrassing …

* * *

Del verbo comer: ( conjugate comer)

como es:

1ª persona singular (yo) presente indicativo

Multiple Entries:
algo como
comer
como
cómo
comer ( conjugate comer) verbo intransitivo
a) ( en general) to eat;

◊ no tengo ganas de cómo I'm not hungry;

este niño no me come nada (fam) this child won't eat anything (colloq);
dar(le) de cómo a algn (en la boca) to spoonfeed sb;
darle de cómo al gato/al niño to feed the cat/the kid;
salir a cómo (fuera) to go out for a meal, to eat out;
¿qué hay de cómo? ( a mediodía) what's for lunch?;

( por la noche) what's for dinner o supper?
b) (esp Esp, Méx) ( almorzar) to have lunch;

◊ nos invitaron a cómo they asked us to lunch

c) (esp AmL) ( cenar) to have dinner

verbo transitivo
a) ‹fruta/verdura/carne› to eat;

◊ ¿puedo cómo otro? can I have another one?;

no tienen qué cómo they don't have anything to eat
b) (fam) ( hacer desaparecer) See Also→ comerse 3

c) (en ajedrez, damas) to take

comerse verbo pronominal
1
a) ( al escribir) ‹acento/palabra› to leave off;

‹línea/párrafo› to miss out
b) ( al hablar) ‹ letra› to leave off;

‹ palabra› to swallow
2 ( enf) ‹ comida› to eat;
◊ cómetelo todo eat it all up;

cómose las uñas to bite one's nails
3 (fam) ( hacer desaparecer)
a) [acido/óxido] to eat away (at);

[polilla/ratón] to eat away (at)
b) [inflación/alquiler] ‹sueldo/ahorros› to eat away at

como preposición
a) ( en calidad de) as;

◊ quiero hablarte cómo amigo I want to speak to you as a friend

b) ( con el nombre de) as;

◊ se la conoce cómo `flor de luz' it's known as `flor de luz'

c) (en comparaciones, contrastes) like;

◊ uno cómo el tuyo one like yours;

¡no hay nada cómo un buen coñac! there's nothing like a good brandy!;
es cómo para echarse a llorar it's enough to make you want to cry
d) ( en locs)

◊ así como (frml) as well as;

como mucho/poco at (the) most/at least;
como ser (CS) such as, for example;
como si (+ subj) as if, as though
■ conjunción
a) ( de la manera que) as;

◊ tal cómo había prometido just as he had promised;

cómo era de esperar as was to be expected;
no me gustó cómo lo dijo I didn't like the way she said it;
(tal y) cómo están las cosas as things stand;
hazlo cómo quieras/cómo mejor puedas do it any way you like/as best as you can;
no voy — cómo quieras I'm not going — please yourself
b) ( puesto que) as, since;

◊ cómo era temprano, fui a dar una vuelta as it was early, I went for a walk

c) (si) (+ subj) if;

◊ cómo te pille … if I catch you …

■ adverbio ( expresando aproximación) about;
◊ está cómo a cincuenta kilómetros it's about fifty kilometers away;

un sabor cómo a almendras a kind of almondy taste
cómo adverbio
a) ( de qué manera) how;

◊ ¿cómo estás? how are you?;

¿cómo es tu novia? what's your girlfriend like?;
¿cómo es de grande? how big is it?;
¿cómo te llamas? what's your name?
b) ( por qué) why, how come (colloq);

◊ ¿cómo no me lo dijiste antes? why didn't you tell me before?

c) ( al solicitar que se repita algo) sorry?, pardon?;

◊ ¿cómo dijo? sorry, what did you say?

d) ( en exclamaciones):

◊ ¡cómo llueve! it's really raining!;

¡cómo comes! the amount you eat!;
¡cómo! ¿no te lo han dicho? what! haven't they told you?
e) ( en locs)

◊ ¿a cómo …?: ¿a cómo están los tomates? (fam) how much are the tomatoes?;

¿a cómo estamos hoy? (AmL) what's the date today?;
¡cómo no! of course!;
¿cómo que …?: ¿cómo que no fuiste tú? what do you mean it wasn't you?;
aquí no está — ¿cómo que no? it isn't here — what do you mean it isn't there?
comer
I verbo transitivo
1 to eat
2 (en el parchís, etc) to take
3 (estrechar) ese corte de pelo te come la cara, that haircut makes your face look thinner
ese mueble te come mucho salón, that piece of furniture makes your living room look smaller
II verbo intransitivo to eat: hay que darle de comer al perro, we have to feed the dog
♦ Locuciones: familiar comer como una lima, to eat like a horse
familiar comer el coco/tarro a alguien, to brainwash somebody
sin comerlo ni beberlo, le pusieron una sanción, although he has nothing to do with it, he was disciplined
como
I adverbio
1 (manera) how: hazlo como quieras, do it however you like
me gusta como habla, I like the way he speaks
2 (semejanza, equivalencia) as: es como tú, he's just like you
terco como una mula, as stubborn as a mule
3 (conformidad) as: como estaba diciendo..., as I was saying...
como indica el prospecto, as the instructions say
4 (aproximadamente) about
como a la mitad de camino, more or less halfway
como unos treinta, about thirty
II conj
1 como [+ subj], (si) if: como no comas, no vas al cine, if you don't eat, you won't go to the cinema
2 (porque) as, since
como llamó tan tarde, ya no me encontró, as he phoned so late, he didn't find me in
3 como si, as if
como si nada o tal cosa, as if nothing had happened
familiar como si lo viera, I can just imagine it
III prep (en calidad de) as: lo aconsejé como amigo, I advised him as a friend
visitó el museo como experto, she visited the museum as an expert
¿As, like o how?
As se usa para hablar de la función, uso, papel o trabajo de una persona o cosa (trabajó como camarera durante las vacaciones, she worked as a waitress during the holidays) o para comparar dos acciones o situaciones y expresar su similitud. En este caso es necesario disponer de un verbo: Entró de botones, como lo había hecho su padre veinte años antes. He entered as an office-boy, as his father had twenty years before.
Cuando como va seguido de un sustantivo o pronombre también puedes usar like para comparar dos acciones o situaciones: Es como su padre. He's just like his father. Sin embargo, si va seguido de una preposición, hay que usar as: En marzo, como en abril, llovió. In March, as in April, it rained.
Nunca debes usar how en comparaciones, porque sólo expresa la manera de hacer las cosas: ¿Cómo lo hiciste?, How did you do it?
cómo adverbio
1 (interrogativo) how: ¿cómo es de alto?, how high is it?
¿cómo estás?, how are you?
¿cómo se hace?, how is it made?
2 (cuánto) ¿a cómo están los plátanos?, how much are the bananas?
3 (por qué) ¿cómo es que no nos avisaste?, why didn't you warn us?
familiar ¿cómo es eso?, how come?
4 (cuando no se ha oído bien) ¿cómo?, what?
5 (exclamativo) how
¡cómo ha cambiado!, how she's changed!
♦ Locuciones: cómo no, of course
' cómo' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
aburrirse
- acabada
- acabado
- acondicionar
- acreditar
- actuar
- adiós
- alma
- alquilar
- alta
- alto
- amable
- andar
- apear
- apenas
- aprendizaje
- arreglarse
- arte
- así
- atizar
- atonía
- baja
- bajo
- bala
- balsa
- bañera
- bastante
- beber
- bestia
- borrega
- borrego
- botija
- buenamente
- cabra
- cada
- caracterización
- casa
- cencerro
- cerrarse
- cesar
- chinche
- cielo
- coco
- coletilla
- colorada
- colorado
- comer
- como
- como quiera
- comoquiera
English:
ablaze
- above
- abroad
- acclaim
- accordingly
- act
- address
- alternatively
- always
- arouse
- as
- ashen
- attractive
- awaken
- away
- back
- barrage
- bash out
- be
- beaver away
- best
- bicker
- big
- black
- blind
- bolt
- bombshell
- bone
- border
- bored
- both
- break
- breed
- brownout
- by-product
- cake
- calculate
- care
- chalk
- champagne
- change
- charm
- cheer
- churn out
- class
- climax
- clown around
- coin
- colour
- come about

* * *

Como nm

el lago Como Lake Como

* * *

como

I adv

1 as;

como amigo as a friend

2 ( aproximadamente)

:

había como cincuenta there were about fifty;

hace como una hora about an hour ago

3

:

así como as well as

II conj

1 if;

como si as if;

como si fuera tonto as if he were o was an idiot;

como no bebas vas a enfermar if you don’t drink you’ll get sick

2 expresando causa as, since;

como no llegó, me fui solo as o since she didn’t arrive, I went by myself

3

:

me gusta como habla I like the way he talks;

como quiera any way you want

* * *

cómo adv

: how

¿cómo estás?: how are you?

¿a cómo están las manzanas?: how much are the apples?

¿cómo?: excuse me?, what was that?

¿se puede? ¡cómo no!: may I? please do!

como adv

1) : around, about

cuesta como 500 pesos: it costs around 500 pesos

2) : kind of, like

tengo como mareos: I'm kind of dizzy

como conj

1) : how, as

hazlo como dijiste que lo harías: do it the way you said you would

2) : since, given that

como estaba lloviendo, no salí: since it was raining, I didn't go out

3) : if

como lo vuelva a hacer lo arrestarán: if he does that again he'll be arrested

4)

como quiera : in any way

como prep

1) : like, as

ligero como una pluma: light as a feather

2)

así como : as well as

* * *

como¹ adv

1. (manera) how

te puedes vestir como quieras you can dress how you like

hazlo como te he enseñado do it the way I showed you

2. (comparaciones) as / like

ya estás tan alta como tu hermano you're as tall as your brother now

tengo una camiseta como ésa I've got a T shirt like that one

3. (según) as

como se puede ver as can be seen

4. (ejemplo) like

algunas aves, como el pingüino, no vuelan some birds, like penguins, can't fly

5. (aproximadamente) about

creo que tengo como cien novelas de aventuras I think I've got about a hundred adventure novels

6. (en calidad de) as

utiliza la caja como una mesilla use the box as a beside table

como sea at all costs / no matter what

como si as if / as though

sigue como si no estuviera aquí carry on as if I weren't here

como² conj

1. (causa) as

como hacía sol, nos fuimos a la playa as it was sunny, we went to the beach

2. (condición) if

como llegues tarde, te quedarás sin pastel if you're late, you won't get any cake

Spanish-English dictionary > como
23 ὁ

ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

A demonstr. Pronoun.

B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.

C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual τοῖιν Od.18.34
, al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ; οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404
(anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ; τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11
; τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18
; τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e
; τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e
; τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75
(τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484, ταῖν Lys.19.17
, Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem., μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8
(Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)

A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):

I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun, αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105
; τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186
, cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.

II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12
, al.

III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ; θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43
, cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.

IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.

V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.

VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,
ὁ δέ
the former, Pl.Prt. 359e
, Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595
; τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d
, etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28
, cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ; πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c
; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg., ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6
: sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317
-19, cf. 116 ; τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102
, cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.

2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24
; τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b
; οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a
, etc.

3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41
; νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c
, cf. Phlb. 13c.

4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.

5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3
, cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304
; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ; τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843
, etc. ; ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205
(v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ; σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45
, cf. μέν D.
III ; γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d
, cf. Tht. 181d.

6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491
; τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3
, cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87
; ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6
: this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.

7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.

8 the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ' ὁ.. οὔθ' ὁ Il.15.417
; ἢ τοῖσιν ἢ τοῖς A.Supp. 439
; οὔτε τοῖς οὔτε τοῖς Pl.Lg. 701e
.

VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,

1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v. ὅς A.
II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc., καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a
, cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt., καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61
, al.

2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b
: but mostly in acc., καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23
, cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ; τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141
, cf. 9.68 ; τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243
; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398
, cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.; τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53
; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.

VIII abs. usages of single cases,

1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12
.

b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ; τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46
; δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210
:—only poet.

c of Manner,
τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν
in this way, thus, Od.8.510
.

d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48
.

e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.

2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose, τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d
, Sph. 230b.

b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.

3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6), τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37
; τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89
; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.

4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14
; τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90
: sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107
,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.

5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.

b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.; ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32
, cf. A.Eu. 462 ; τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59
.

c in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (lit. before this [day]), and to-day's, IG9(2).517.43 (Larissa, iii B.C.).

6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs., ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90
, Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.; ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71
; τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c
: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47
codd.; with πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19
, cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).

B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,
αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον
the hindmost man, Il.11.178
; τὸν ἄριστον 17.80
; τὸν δύστηνον 22.59
; τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325
; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in τῶν ἄλλων 2.674
, al.: with Advs., τὸ πρίν 24.543
, al.; τὸ πάρος περ 17.720
; τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583
; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ; τὰ πρῶτα 1.6
,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ; ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559
.—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.

I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron., τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5
; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12; οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b
.

b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).

c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.

d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.

2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109
; πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242
, etc.

b freq. with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45
, etc.

3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.

4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.

5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.; τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148
; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.

6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ; τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b
; ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d
, cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ; ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8
; τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8
: hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.

7 before Prons.,

a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc., τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a
,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ; τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a
; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.

b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.

c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,
ὁ τοιοῦτος
that sort of person, X.Mem.4.2.21
, etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art., τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13
.

8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6, πολύς 11.3
, etc.

9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.

II elliptic expressions:

1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.

2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers., τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48
. But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86
; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.

3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.

4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.

5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52
; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266
, cf.[315] (lyr.); ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412
(lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ; τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731
.

C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262
, cf. 1.300, al. ; Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526
(lyr.); Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86
; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3
, cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag., τῆς S.OC 1258
, Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.); τῷ S.Ph.14
; τήν Id.OC 747
, Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg. τεῦ Il.18.192
(s.v.l.).

D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:

a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.

b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65
, ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60
, etc.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ
24 Á

shall

* * *

a negative suffix to verbs, not;

era útmakligt, at it is not unmeet that.

* * *

1.

á, prep., often used elliptically, or even adverbially, [Goth. ana; Engl. on; Germ. an. In the Scandinavian idioms the liquid n is absorbed. In English the same has been supposed to happen in adverbial phrases, e. g. ‘along, away, abroad, afoot, again, agate, ahead, aloft, alone, askew, aside, astray, awry,’ etc. It is indeed true that the Ormulum in its northern dialect freq. uses o, even in common phrases, such as ‘o boke, o land, o life, o slæpe, o strande, o write, o naht, o loft,’ etc., v. the glossary; and we may compare on foot and afoot, on sleep (Engl. Vers. of Bible) and asleep; A. S. a-butan and on-butan (about); agen and ongean (again, against); on bæc, aback; on life, alive; on middan, amid. But it is more than likely that in the expressions quoted above, as well as in numberless others, as well in old as in modern English, the English a- as well as the o- of the Ormulum and the modern Scottish and north of England o- are in reality remains of this very á pronounced au or ow, which was brought by the Scandinavian settlers into the north of England. In the struggle for supremacy between the English dialects after the Conquest, the Scandinavian form á or a won the day in many cases to the exclusion of the Anglo-Saxon on. Some of these adverbs have representatives only in the Scandinavian tongues, not in Anglo-Saxon; see below, with dat. B. II, C. VII; with acc. C. I. and VI. The prep. á denotes the surface or outside; í and ór the inside; at, til, and frá, nearness measured to or from an object: á thus answers to the Gr. επί; the Lat. in includes á and i together.]

With dat. and acc.: in the first case with the notion of remaining on a place, answering to Lat. in with abl.; in the last with the notion of motion to the place, = Lat. in with acc.

WITH DAT.

A. Loc.

I. generally on, upon; á gólfi, on the floor, Nj. 2; á hendi, on the hand (of a ring), 48, 225; á palli, 50; á steini, 108; á vegg, 115; á sjá ok á landi, on sea and land. In some instances the distinction between d and i is loose and wavering, but in most cases common sense and usage decide; thus ‘á bók’ merely denotes the letters, the penmanship, ‘í’ the contents of a book; mod. usage, however, prefers ‘í,’ lesa í bók, but stafr á bók. Old writers on the other hand; á bókum Enskum, in English books, Landn. 24, but í Aldafars bók, 23 (in the book De Mensurâ Temporum, by Bede), cp. Grág. i. 76, where á is a false reading instead of at; á bréfi, the contents of a letter: of clothing or arms, mítr á höfði, sverð á hlið, mitre on head, sword on side, Fms. i. 266, viii. 404; hafa lykil á sér, on one’s person, 655 xxvii. 22; möttull á tyglum, a mantle hanging on (i. e. fastened by) laces, Fms. vii. 201: á þingi means to be present at a meeting; í þingi, to abide within a jurisdiction; á himni, á jörðu, on (Engl. in) heaven and earth, e. g. in the Lord’s Prayer, but í helviti, in hell; á Gimli, Edda (of a heavenly abode); á báti, á skipi denote crew and cargo, ‘í’ the timber or materials of which a ship is built, Eg. 385; vera í stafni á skipi, 177: á skógi, to be abroad in a wood (of a hunter, robber, deer); but to be situated (a house), at work (to fell timber), í skógi, 573, Fs. 5, Fms. iii. 122, viii. 31, xi. 1, Glúm. 330, Landn. 173; á mörkinni, Fms. i. 8, but í mörk, of a farm; á firðinum means lying in a firth, of ships or islands (on the surface of the water), þær eyjar liggja á Breiðafirði, Ld. 36; but í firði, living in a district named Firth; á landi, Nj. 98, Fms. xi. 386.

II. á is commonly used in connection with the pr. names or countries terminating in ‘land,’ Engl. in, á Englandi, Írlandi, Skotlandi, Bretlandi, Saxlandi, Vindlandi, Vínlandi, Grænalandi, Íslandi, Hálogalandi, Rogalandi, Jótlandi, Frakklandi, Hjaltlandi, Jamtalandi, Hvítramannalandi, Norðrlöndum, etc., vide Landn. and the index to Fms. xii. In old writers í is here very rare, in modern authors more frequent; taste and the context in many instances decide. An Icelander would now say, speaking of the queen or king, ‘á Englandi,’ ruling over, but to live ‘í Englandi,’ or ‘á Englandi;’ the rule in the last case not being quite fixed.

2. in connection with other names of countries: á Mæri, Vörs, Ögðum, Fjölum, all districts of Norway, v. Landn.; á Mýrum (in Icel.), á Finnmörk, Landn., á Fjóni (a Danish island); but í Danmörk, Svíþjóð (á Svíþjóðu is poët., Gs. 13).

3. before Icel. farms denoting open and elevated slopes and spaces (not too high, because then ‘at’ must be used), such as ‘staðr, völlr, ból, hjalli, bakki, heimr, eyri,’ etc.; á Veggjum, Landn. 69; á Hólmlátri, id.: those ending in ‘-staðr,’ á Geirmundarstöðum, Þórisstöðum, Jarðlangsstöðum…, Landn.: ‘-völlr,’ á Möðruvöllum: á Fitjum (the farm) í Storð (the island), í Fenhring (the island) á Aski (the farm), Landn., Eg.: ‘-nes’ sometimes takes á, sometimes í (in mod. usage always ‘í’), á Nesi, Eb. 14, or í Krossnesi, 30; in the last case the notion of island, νησος, prevails: so also, ‘fjörðr,’ as, þeir börðust á Vigrafirði (of a fight o n the ice), Landn. 101, but orusta í Hafrsfirði, 122: with ‘-bær,’ á is used in the sense of a farm or estate, hón sa á e-m bæ mikit hús ok fagrt, Edda 22; ‘í bæ’ means within doors, of the buildings: with ‘Bær’ as pr. name Landn. uses ‘í,’ 71, 160, 257, 309, 332.

4. denoting on or just above; of the sun, when the time is fixed by regarding the sun in connection with points in the horizon, a standing phrase in Icel.; sól á gjáhamri, when the sun is on the crag of the Rift, Grág. i. 26, cp. Glúm. 387; so, brú á á, a bridge on a river, Fms. viii. 179, Hrafn. 20; taka hús á e-m, to surprise one, to take the house over his head, Fms. i. 11.

III. á is sometimes used in old writers where we should now expect an acc., esp. in the phrase, leggja sverði (or the like) á e-m, or á e-m miðjum, to stab, Eg. 216, Gísl. 106, Band. 14; þá stakk Starkaðr sprotanum á konungi, then Starkad stabbed the king with the wand, Fas. iii. 34; bíta á kampi (vör), to bite the lips, as a token of pain or emotion, Nj. 209, 68; taka á e-u, to touch a thing, lay hold of it, v. taka; fá á e-u, id. (poët.); leggja hendr á (better at) síðum, in wrestling, Fms. x. 331; koma á úvart á e-m, to come on one unawares, ix. 407 (rare).

B. TEMP. of a particular point or period of time, at, on, in:

I. gener. denoting during, in the course of; á nótt, degi, nætrþeli …, Bs. i. 139; or spec. adding a pron. or an adject., á næsta sumri, the next summer; á því ári, þingi, misseri, hausti, vári, sumri …, during, in that year …, Bs. i. 679, etc.; á þrem sumrum, in the course of three summers, Grág. i. 218; á þrem várum, Fms. ii. 114; á hálfs mánaðar fresti, within half a month’s delay, Nj. 99; á tvítugs, sextugs … aldri, á barns, gamals aldri, etc., at the age of …, v. aldr: á dögum e-s, in the days of, in his reign or time, Landn. 24, Hrafn. 3, Fms. ix. 229.

II. used of a fixed recurrent period or season; á várum, sumrum, haustum, vetrum, á kveldum, every spring, summer …, in the evenings, Eg. 711, Fms. i. 23, 25, vi. 394, Landn. 292: with the numeral adverbs, cp. Lat. ter in anno, um sinn á mánuði, ári, once a month, once a year, where the Engl. a is not the article but the preposition, Grág. i. 89.

III. of duration; á degi, during a whole day, Fms. v. 48; á sjau nóttum, Bárð. 166; á því meli, during that time, in the meantime, Grág. i. 259.

IV. connected with the seasons (á vetri, sumri, vári, hausti), ‘á’ denotes the next preceding season, the last winter, summer, autumn, Eb. 40, 238, Ld. 206: in such instances ‘á’ denotes the past, ‘at’ the future, ‘í’ the present; thus í vetri in old writers means this winter; á vetri, last winter; at vetri, next winter, Eb. 68 (in a verse), etc.

C. In various other relations, more or less metaphorically, on, upon, in, to, with, towards, against:

I. denoting object, in respect of, against, almost periphrastically; dvelja á náðum e-s, under one’s protection, Fms. i. 74; hafa metnað á e-u, to be proud of, to take pride in a thing, 127.

2. denoting a personal relation, in; bæta e-t á e-m, to make amends, i. e. to one personally; misgöra e-t á e-m, to inflict wrong on one; hafa elsku (hatr) á e-m, to bear love ( hatred) to one, Fms. ix. 242; hefna sín á e-m, to take revenge on one’s person, on anyone; rjúfa sætt á e-m, to break truce on the person of any one, to offend against his person, Nj. 103; hafa sár á sér, 101; sjá á e-m, to read on or in one’s face; sér hann á hverjum manni hvárt til þín er vel eðr illa, 106; var þat brátt auðséð á hennar högum, at …, it could soon be seen in all her doings, that …, Ld. 22.

3. also generally to shew signs of a thing; sýna fáleika á sér, to shew marks of displeasure, Nj. 14, Fs. 14; taka vel, illa, lítt, á e-u, to take a thing well, ill, or indifferently, id.; finna á sér, to feel in oneself; fann lítt á honum, hvárt …, it could hardly be seen in his face, whether …, Eb. 42; líkindi eru á, it is likely, Ld. 172; göra kost á e-u, to give a choice, chance of it, 178; eiga vald á e-u, to have power over …, Nj. 10.

II. denoting encumbrance, duty, liability; er fimtardómsmál á þeim, to be subject to …, Nj. 231; the phrase, hafa e-t á hendi, or vera á hendi e-m, on one’s hands, of work or duty to be done; eindagi á fé, term, pay day, Grág. i. 140; ómagi (skylda, afvinna) á fé, of a burden or encumbrance, D. I. and Grág. in several passages.

III. with a personal pronoun, sér, mér, honum …, denoting personal appearance, temper, character, look, or the like; vera þungr, léttr … á sér, to be heavy or light, either bodily or mentally; þungr á sér, corpulent, Sturl. i. 112; kátr ok léttr á sér, of a gay and light temper, Fms. x. 152; þat bragð hafði hann á sér, he looked as if, … the expression of his face was as though …, Ld., cp. the mod. phrase, hafa á sér svip, bragð, æði, sið, of one’s manner or personal appearance, to bear oneself as, or the like; skjótr (seinn) á fæti, speedy ( slow) of foot, Nj. 258.

IV. as a periphrasis of the possessive pronoun connected with the limbs or parts of the body. In common Icel. such phrases as my hands, eyes, head … are hardly ever used, but höfuð, eyru, hár, nef, munnr, hendr, fætr … á mér; so ‘í’ is used of the internal parts, e. g. hjarta, bein … í mér; the eyes are regarded as inside the body, augun í honum: also without the possessive pronoun, or as a periphrasis for a genitive, brjóstið á e-m, one’s breast, Nj. 95, Edda 15; súrnar í augum, it smarts in my eyes, my eyes smart, Nj. 202; kviðinn á sér, its belly, 655 xxx. 5, Fms. vi. 350; hendr á henni, her hands, Gísl. (in a verse); í vörunum á honum, on his lips, Band. 14; ristin á honum, his step, Fms. viii. 141; harðr í tungu, sharp of tongue, Hallfred (Fs. 114); kalt (heitt) á fingrum, höndum, fótum …, cold ( warm) in the fingers, hands, feet …, i. e. with cold fingers, etc.; cp. also the phrase, verða vísa (orð) á munni, of extemporising verses or speeches, freq. in the Sagas; fastr á fótum, fast by the leg, of a bondsman, Nj. 27: of the whole body, díla fundu þeir á honum, 209. The pers. pron. is used only in solemn style (poetry, hymns, the Bible), and perhaps only when influenced by foreign languages, e. g. mitt hjarta hví svo hryggist þú, as a translation of ‘warumb betrübst du dich mein Herz?’ the famous hymn by Hans Sachs; instead of the popular hjartað í mér, Sl. 43, 44: hjartað mitt is only used as a term of endearment, as by a husband to his wife, parents to their child, or the like, in a metaphorical sense; the heart proper is ‘í mér,’ not ‘mitt.’

2. of other things, and as a periphrasis of a genitive, of a part belonging to the whole, e. g. dyrr á husi = húsdyrr, at the house-doors; turn á kirkju = kirkju turn; stafn, skutr, segl, árar … á skipi, the stem, stern, sail … of a ship, Fms. ix. 135; blöð á lauk, á tré …, leaves of a leek, of a tree …, Fas. i. 469; egg á sverði = sverðs egg; stafr á bók; kjölr á bók, and in endless other instances.

V. denoting instrumentality, by, on, or a-, by means of; afla fjár á hólmgöngum, to make money a-duelling, by means of duels, Eg. 498; á verkum sínum, to subsist on one’s own work, Njarð. 366: as a law term, sekjast á e-ju, to be convicted upon …, Grág. i. 123; sekst maðr þar á sínu eigini ( a man is guilty in re sua), ef hann tekr af þeim manni er heimild ( possessio) hefir til, ii. 191; falla á verkum sínum, to be killed flagranti delicto, v. above; fella e-n á bragði, by a sleight in wrestling; komast undan á flótta, to escape by flight, Eg. 11; á hlaupi, by one’s feet, by speed, Hkr. ii. 168; lifa á e-u, to feed on; bergja á e-u, to taste of a thing; svala sér á e-u, to quench the thirst on.

VI. with subst. numerals; á þriðja tigi manna, up to thirty, i. e. from about twenty to thirty, Ld. 194; á öðru hundraði skipa, from one to two hundred sail strong, Fms. x. 126; á níunda tigi, between eighty and ninety years of age, Eg. 764, v. above: used as prep., á hendi, on one’s hand, i. e. bound to do it, v. hönd.

VII. in more or less adverbial phrases it may often be translated in Engl. by a participle and a- prefixed; á lopti, aloft; á floti, afloat; á lífi, alive; á verðgangi, a-begging; á brautu, away; á baki, a-back, behind, past; á milli, a-tween; á laun, alone, secretly; á launungu, id.; á móti, against; á enda, at an end, gone; á huldu, hidden; fara á hæli, to go a-heel, i. e. backwards, Fms. vii. 70;—but in many cases these phrases are transl. by the Engl. partic. with a, which is then perh. a mere prefix, not a prep., á flugi, a-flying in the air, Nj. 79; vera á gangi, a-going; á ferli, to be about; á leiki, a-playing, Fms. i. 78; á sundi, a-swimming, ii. 27; á verði, a-watching, x. 201; á hrakningi, a-wandering; á reiki, a-wavering; á skjálfi, a-shivering; á-hleri, a-listening; á tali, a-talking, Ísl. ii. 200; á hlaupi, a-running, Hkr. ii. 268; á verki, a-working; á veiðum, a-hunting; á fiski, a-fishing; á beit, grazing: and as a law term it even means in flagranti, N. G. L. i. 348.

VIII. used absolutely without a case in reference to the air or the weather, where ‘á’ is almost redundant; þoka var á mikil, a thick fog came on, Nj. 267; niðamyrkr var á, pitch darkness came on, Eg. 210; allhvast á norðan, a very strong breeze from the north, Fms. ix. 20; þá var á norðrænt, a north wind came on, 42, Ld. 56; hvaðan sem á er, from whatever point the wind is; var á hríð veðrs, a snow storm came on, Nj. 282; görði á regn, rain came on, Fms. vi. 394, xi. 35, Ld. 156.

WITH ACC.

A. Loc.

I. denoting simple direction towards, esp. connected with verbs of motion, going, or the like; hann gékk á bergsnös, Eg. 389; á hamar, Fas. ii. 517.

2. in phrases denoting direction; liggja á útborða, lying on the outside of the ship, Eg. 354; á annat borð skipinu, Fms. vii. 260; á bæði borð, on both sides of the ship, Nj. 124, Ld. 56; á tvær hliðar, on both sides, Fms. v. 73. Ísl. ii. 159; á hlið, sidewards; út á hlið, Nj. 262, Edda 44; á aðra hönd henni, Nj. 50, Ld. 46; höggva á tvær hendr, to hew or strike right and left, Ísl. ii. 368, Fas. i. 384, Fms. viii. 363, x. 383.

3. upp á, upon; hann tók augu Þjaza ok kastaði upp á himin, Edda 47: with verbs denoting to look, see, horfa, sjá, líta, etc.; hann rak skygnur á land, he cast glances towards the land, Ld. 154.

II. denoting direction with or without the idea of arriving:

1. with verbs denoting to aim at; of a blow or thrust, stefna á fótinn, Nj. 84; spjótið stefnir á hann miðjan, 205: of the wind, gékk veðrit á vestr, the wind veered to west, Fms. ix. 28; sigla á haf, to stand out to sea, Hkr. i. 146, Fms. i. 39: with ‘út’ added, Eg. 390, Fms. x. 349.

2. conveying the notion of arriving, or the intervening space being traversed; spjótið kom á miðjan skjöldinn, Eg. 379, Nj. 96, 97; langt upp á land, far up inland, Hkr. i. 146: to reach, taka ofan á belti, of the long locks of a woman, to reach down to the belt, Nj. 2; ofan á bringu, 48; á þa ofan, 91.

III. without reference to the space traversed, connected with verbs denoting to go, turn, come, ride, sail, throw, or the like, motion of every kind; hann kastar honum á völlinn, he flings him down, Nj. 91; hlaupa á skip sitt, to leap on board his ship, 43; á hest, to mount quickly, Edda 75; á lend hestinum, Nj. 91; hann gengr á sáðland sitt, he walks on to his fields, 82: on, upon, komast á fætr, to get upon one’s legs, 92; ganga á land, to go a-shore, Fms. i. 40; ganga á þing, vii. 242, Grág. (often); á skóg, á merkr ok skóga, into a wood, Fb. i. 134, 257, Fms. xi. 118, Eg. 577, Nj. 130; fara á Finnmörk, to go travelling in Finmark, Fms. i. 8; koma, fara á bæ, to arrive at the farm-house; koma á veginn, Eg. 578; stíga á bát, skip, to go on board, 158; hann gékk upp á borg, he went up to the burg (castle), 717; en er þeir komu á loptriðið, 236; hrinda skipum á vatn, to float the ships down into the water, Fms. i. 58; reka austr á haf, to drift eastwards on the sea, x. 145; ríða ofan á, to ride down or over, Nj. 82.

IV. in some cases the acc. is used where the dat. would be used, esp. with verbs denoting to see or hear, in such phrases as, þeir sá boða mikinn inn á fjörðinn, they saw great breakers away up in the bight of the firth, the acc. being due perhaps to a motion or direction of the eye or ear towards the object, Nj. 124; sá þeir fólkit á land, they saw the people in the direction of land, Fas. ii. 517: in phrases denoting to be placed, to sit, to be seated, the seat or bench is freq. in the acc. where the dat. would now be used; konungr var þar á land upp, the king was then up the country, the spectator or narrator is conceived as looking from the shore or sea-side, Nj. 46; sitja á miðjan bekk, to be seated on the middle bench, 50; skyldi konungs sæti vera á þann bekk … annat öndvegi var á hinn úæðra pall; hann setti konungs hásæti á miðjan þverpall, Fms. vi. 439, 440, cp. Fagrsk. l. c., Sturl. iii. 182; eru víða fjallbygðir upp á mörkina, in the mark or forest, Eg. 58; var þar mörk mikil á land upp, 229; mannsafnaðr er á land upp (viewed from the sea), Ld. 76; stóll var settr á mótið, Fas. i. 58; beiða fars á skip, to beg a passage, Grág. i. 90.

V. denoting parts of the body; bíta e-n á barka, to bite one in the throat, Ísl. ii. 447; skera á háls, to cut the throat of any one, Nj. 156; brjóta e-n á háls, to break any one’s neck; brjóta e-n á bak, to break any one’s back, Fms. vii. 119; kalinn á kné, frozen to the knees with cold, Hm. 3.

VI. denoting round; láta reipi á háls hesti, round his horse’s neck, 623. 33; leggja söðul á hest, Nj. 83; and ellipt., leggja á, to saddle; breiða feld á hofuð sér, to wrap a cloak over his head, 164; reyta á sik mosa, to gather moss to cover oneself with, 267; spenna hring á hönd, á fingr, Eg. 300.

VII. denoting a burden; stela mat á tvá hesta, hey á fimtán hesta, i. e. a two, a fifteen horse load, Nj. 74: metaph., kjósa feigð á menn, to choose death upon them, i. e. doom them to death, Edda 22.

B. TEMP.

I. of a period of time, at, to; á morgun, to-morrow (í morgun now means the past morning, the morning of to-day), Ísl. ii. 333.

II. if connected with the word day, ‘á’ is now used before a fixed or marked day, a day of the week, a feast day, or the like; á Laugardag, á Sunnudag …, on Saturday, Sunday, the Old Engl. a-Sunday, a-Monday, etc.; á Jóladaginn, Páskadaginn, on Yule and Easter-day; but in old writers more often used ellipt. Sunnudaginn, Jóladaginn …, by dropping the prep. ‘á,’ Fms. viii. 397, Grág. i. 18.

III. connected with ‘dagr’ with the definite article suffixed, ‘á’ denotes a fixed, recurring period or season, in; á daginn, during the day-time, every day in turn, Grett. 91 A.

IV. connected with ‘evening, morning, the seasons,’ with the article; á kveldit, every evening, Ld. 14; á sumarit, every summer, Vd. 128, where the new Ed. Fs. 51 reads sumrum; á haust, every autumn, Eg. 741 (perh. a misprint instead of á haustin or á haustum); á vetrinn, in the winter time, 710; á várit, every spring, Gþl. 347; the sing., however, is very rare in such cases, the old as well as mod. usage prefers the plur.; á nætrnar, by night, Nj. 210; á várin, Eg. 710; á sumrin, haustin, á morgnana, in the morning (á morgin, sing., means to-morrow); á kveldin, in the evening, only ‘dagr’ is used in sing., v. above (á daginn, not á dagana); but elliptically and by dropping the article, Icelanders say, kveld og morgna, nótt og dag, vetr sumar vor og haust, in the same sense as those above mentioned.

V. denoting duration, the article is dropped in the negative phrase, aldri á sinn dag, never during one’s life; aldri á mína daga, never in my life, Bjarn. 8, where a possess. pron. is put between noun and prep., but this phrase is very rare. Such phrases as, á þann dag, that day, and á þenna dag, Stj. 12, 655 xxx. 2. 20, are unclassical.

VI. á dag without article can only be used in a distributive sense, e. g. tvisvar á dag, twice a-day; this use is at present freq. in Icel., yet instances from old writers are not on record.

VII. denoting a movement onward in time, such as, liðið á nótt, dag, kveld, morgun, sumar, vetr, vár, haust (or nóttina, daginn …), jól, páska, föstu, or the like, far on in the night, day …, Edda 33; er á leið vetrinn, when the winter was well on, as the winter wore on, Nj. 126; cp. áliðinn: also in the phrase, hniginn á inn efra aldr, well stricken in years, Ld. 68.

C. Metaph. and in various relations:

I. somewhat metaphorically, denoting an act only (not the place); fara á fund, á vit e-s, to call for one, Eg. 140; koma á ræðu við e-n, to come to a parley with, to speak, 173; ganga á tal, Nj. 103; skora á hólm, to challenge to a duel on an island; koma á grið, to enter into a service, to be domiciled, Grág. i. 151; fara á veiðar, to go a-hunting, Fms. i. 8.

β. generally denoting on, upon, in, to; bjóða vöxtu á féit, to offer interest on the money, Grág. i. 198; ganga á berhögg, to come to blows, v. berhögg; fá á e-n, to make an impression upon one, Nj. 79; ganga á vápn e-s, to throw oneself on an enemy’s weapon, meet him face to face, Rd. 310; ganga á lagið, to press on up the spear-shaft after it has passed through one so as to get near one’s foe, i. e. to avail oneself of the last chance; bera fé á e-n, to bribe, Nj. 62; bera öl á e-n, to make drunk, Fas. i. 13; snúinn á e-t, inclined to, Fms. x. 142; sammælast á e-t, to agree upon, Nj. 86; sættast, verða sáttr á e-t, in the same sense, to come to an agreement, settlement, or atonement, 78, Edda 15, Eb. 288, Ld. 50, Fms. i. 279; ganga á mála, to serve for pay as a soldier, Nj. 121; ganga á vald e-s, to put oneself in his power, 267; ganga á sætt, to break an agreement; vega á veittar trygðir, to break truce, Grág. ii. 169.

II. denoting in regard to, in respect to:

1. of colour, complexion, the hue of the hair, or the like; hvítr, jarpr, dökkr … á hár, having white, brown, or dark … hair, Ísl. ii. 190, Nj. 39; svartr á brún ok brá, dark of brow and eyebrow; dökkr á hörund, id., etc.

2. denoting skill, dexterity; hagr á tré, a good carpenter; hagr á járn, málm, smíðar …, an expert worker in iron, metals …, Eg. 4; fimr á boga, good at the bow: also used of mastership in science or arts, meistari á hörpuslátt, a master in striking the harp, Fas. iii. 220; fræðimaðr á kvæði, knowing many poems by heart, Fms. vi. 391; fræðimaðr á landnámssögur ok forna fræði, a learned scholar in histories and antiquities (of Are Frode), Ísl. ii. 189; mikill á íþrótt, skilful in an art, Edda (pref.) 148; but dat. in the phrase, kunna (vel) á skíðum, to be a cunning skater, Fms. i. 9, vii. 120.

3. denoting dimensions; á hæð, lengd, breidd, dýpt …, in the heighth, length, breadth, depth …, Eg. 277; á hvern veg, on each side, Edda 41 (square miles); á annan veg, on the one side, Grág. i. 89.

β. the phrase, á sik, in regard to oneself, vel (illa) á sik kominn, of a fine ( ugly) appearance, Ld. 100, Fas. iii. 74.

III. denoting instrumentality; bjargast á sínar hendr, to live on the work of one’s own hands, (á sínar spýtur is a mod. phrase in the same sense); (vega) á skálir, pundara, to weigh in scales, Grág. ii. 370; at hann hefði tvá pundara, ok hefði á hinn meira keypt en á hinn minna selt, of a man using two scales, a big one for buying and a little one for selling, Sturl. i. 91; á sinn kostnað, at one’s own expense; nefna e-n á nafn, by name, Grág. i. 17, etc. The Icel. also say, spinna á rokk, snældu, to spin on or with a rock or distaff; mala á kvern, to grind in a ‘querne,’ where Edda 73 uses dat.; esp. of musical instruments, syngja, leika á hljóðfæri, hörpu, gígju …; in the old usage, leika hörpu …, Stj. 458.

IV. denoting the manner or way of doing:

1. á þessa lund, in this wise, Grág. ii. 22; á marga vega, á alla, ymsa vega, in many, all, respects, Fms. i. 114; á sitt hóf, in its turn, respectively, Ld. 136, where the context shews that the expression answers to the Lat. mutatis mutandis; á Þýðersku, after German fashion, Sks. 288.

2. esp. of language; mæla, rita á e-a tungu, to speak, write in a tongue; á Írsku, in Irish, Ld. 76; Norrænu, in Norse, Eb. 330, Vm. 35; a Danska tungu, in Danish, i. e. Scandinavian, Norse, or Icelandic, Grág. i. 18; á Vára tungu, i. e. in Icelandic, 181; rita á Norræna tungu, to write in Norse, Hkr. (pref.), Bs. i. 59:—at present, dat. is sometimes used.

3. in some phrases the acc. is used instead of the dat.; hann sýndi á sik mikit gaman, Fms. x. 329; hann lét ekki á sik finna, he shewed no sign of motion, Nj. 111; skaltú önga fáleika á þik gera (Cod. Kalf.), 14.

V. used in a distributive sense; skal mörk kaupa gæzlu á kú, eðr oxa fim vetra gamlan, a mark for every cow, Grág. i. 147; alin á hvert hross, 442; á mann, per man (now freq.): cp. also á dag above, lit. B.

VI. connected with nouns,

1. prepositional; á hendr (with dat.), against; á hæla, at heel, close behind; á bak, at back, i. e. past, after; á vit (with gen.), towards.

2. adverbially; á braut, away, abroad; á víxl, in turns; á mis, amiss; á víð ok dreif, a-wide and a-drift, i. e. dispersedly.

3. used almost redundantly before the following prep.; á eptir, after, behind; á undan, in front of; á meðal, á milli, among; á mót, against; á við, about, alike; á frá (cp. Swed. ifrån), from (rare); á fyrir = fyrir, Haustl. 1; á hjá, beside (rare); á fram, a-head, forwards; á samt, together; ávalt = of allt, always: following a prep., upp á, upon; niðr á, down upon; ofan á, eptir á, post eventum, (temp.) á eptir is loc., id., etc.

VII. connected with many transitive verbs, answering to the Lat. ad- or in-, in composition, in many cases periphrastically for an objective case. The prep. generally follows after the verb, instead of being prefixed to it as in Lat., and answers to the Engl. on, to; heita kalla, hrópa á, to call on; heyra, hlusta, hlyða á, to hearken to, listen to; hyggja, hugsa á, to think on; minna á, to remind; sjá, líta, horfa, stara, mæna, glápa, koma auga … á, to look on; girnast á, to wish for; trúa á, to believe on; skora á, to call on any one to come out, challenge; kæra á, to accuse; heilsa á, to greet; herja, ganga, ríða, hlaupa, ráða … á, to fall on, attack, cp. ágangr, áreið, áhlaup; ljúga á, to tell lies of, to slander; telja á, to carp at; ausa, tala, hella, kasta, verpa … á, to pour, throw on; ríða, bera, dreifa á, to sprinkle on; vanta, skorta á, to fall short of; ala á, to plead, beg; leggja á, to throw a spell on, lay a saddle on; hætta á, to venture on; gizka á, to guess at; kveða á, to fix on, etc.: in a reciprocal sense, haldast á, of mutual strife; sendast á, to exchange presents; skrifast á, to correspond (mod.); kallast á, to shout mutually; standast á, to coincide, so as to be just opposite one another, etc.

2.

f. [Lat. aqua; Goth. ahva; Hel. aha; A. S. eâ; O. H. G. aha, owa; cp. Germ. ach and aue; Fr. eau, eaux; Engl. Ax-, Ex-, etc., in names of places; Swed.-Dan. å; the Scandinavians absorb the hu, so that only a single vowel or diphthong remains of the whole word]:—a river. The old form in nom. dat. acc. sing. is , v. the introduction to A, page 1, Bs. i. 333 sq., where ́n, ́ (acc.), and ́na; so also Greg. 677; the old fragm. of Grág. ii. 222, 223, new Ed. In the Kb. of the Edda the old form occurs twice, viz. page 75, ́na (acc.), (but two lines below, ána), í ́nni (dat.) The old form also repeatedly occurs in the Kb. and Sb. of the Grág., e. g. ii. 266, 267: gen. sing. ár; nom. pl. ár, gen. á contracted, dat. ám, obsolete form ́m; Edda 43, Eg. 80, 99, 133, 185: proverbs, at ósi skal á stemma, answering to the Lat. principiis obsta, Edda 60; hér kemr á til sæfar, here the river runs into the sea, metaph. = this is the very end, seems to have been a favourite ending of old poems; it is recorded in the Húsdrápa and the Norðsetadrápa, v. Edda 96, Skálda 198; cp. the common saying, oil vötn renna til sævar, ‘all waters run into the sea.’ Rivers with glacier water are in Icel. called Hvítá, White river, or Jökulsá: Hitá, Hot river, from a hot spring, opp. to Kaldá, v. Landn.: others take a name from the fish in them, as Laxá, Lax or Salmon river (freq.); Örriða á, etc.: a tributary river is þverá, etc.: ár in the Njála often means the great rivers Ölfusá and Þjórsá in the south of Iceland. Áin helga, a river in Sweden, Hkr. ii: á is also suffixed to the names of foreign rivers, Tempsá = Thames; Dóná, Danube (Germ. Don-au), (mod.), etc. Vide Edda (Gl.) 116, 117, containing the names of over a hundred North-English and Scottish rivers.

COMPDS: áráll, árbakki, árbrot, ardjúp, árfarvegr, árfors, árgljúfr, árhlutr, ármegin, árminni, ármót, áróss, árreki, árstraumr, árströnd, árvað, árvegr, árvöxtr.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > Á
25 tonnage tax company

гос. фин., брит. судоходная компания, платящая налог с тоннажа* !

возможно, нужно новое подзначение к tonnage tax! ссылок маловато, в основном в этом законодательном акте. не разобралась до конца!

http:www.opsi.gov.uk/acts/acts2000/00017-cg.htm

TONNAGE TAX

PART I

INTRODUCTORY

Tonnage tax
"
1. - (1) This Schedule provides an alternative regime (""tonnage tax"") for calculating the profits of a shipping company for the purposes of corporation tax.
" "
(2) The regime applies only if an election to that effect ( a ""tonnage tax election"") is made (see Part II of this Schedule).
"
Companies that are members of a group must join in a group election.

(3) A tonnage tax election may only be made if-

(a) the company or group is a qualifying company or group (see Part III of this Schedule), and

(b) certain requirements are met as to training (see Part IV of this Schedule) and other matters (see Part V of this Schedule).

Tonnage tax companies and groups
"
2. - (1) In this Schedule a ""tonnage tax company"" or ""tonnage tax group"" means a company or group in relation to which a tonnage tax election has effect.
"
(2) References in this Schedule to a company entering or leaving tonnage tax are to its becoming or ceasing to be a tonnage tax company.

References to a company being subject to tonnage tax have a corresponding meaning.

Profits of tonnage tax company

3. - (1) In the case of a tonnage tax company, its tonnage tax profits are brought into charge to corporation tax in place of its relevant shipping profits (see Part VI of this Schedule).

(2) Where profits would be relevant shipping income, any loss accruing to the company is similarly left out of account for the purposes of corporation tax.

Tonnage tax profits: method of calculation

4. - (1) A company's tonnage tax profits for an accounting period are calculated in accordance with this paragraph by reference to the net tonnage of the qualifying ships operated by the company.

For the purposes of the calculation the net tonnage of a ship is rounded down (if necessary) to the nearest multiple of 100 tons.

(2) The calculation is as follows:

Step One Determine the daily profit for each qualifying ship operated by the company by reference to the following table and the net tonnage of the ship:

For each 100 tons up to 1,000 tons

£0.60

For each 100 tons between 1,000 and 10,000 tons

£0.45

For each 100 tons between 10,000 and 25,000 tons

£0.30

For each 100 tons above 25,000 tons

£0.15

Step Two Work out the ship's profit for the accounting period by multiplying the daily profit by-

(a) the number of days in the accounting period, or

(b) if the ship was operated by the company as a qualifying ship for only part of the period, by the number of days in that part.

Step Three Follow Steps One and Two for each of the qualifying ships operated by the company in the accounting period.

Step Four Add together the resulting amounts and the total is the amount of the company's tonnage tax profits for that accounting period.

Tonnage tax profits: calculation in case of joint operation etc.

5. - (1) If two or more companies fall to be regarded as operators of a ship by virtue of a joint interest in the ship, or in an agreement for the use of the ship, the tonnage tax profits of each are calculated as if each were entitled to a share of the profits proportionate to its share of that interest.

(2) If two or more companies fall to be treated as the operator of a ship otherwise than as mentioned in sub-paragraph (1), the tonnage tax profits of each are computed as if each were the only operator.

Measurement of tonnage of ship

6. - (1) References in this Schedule to the gross or net tonnage of a ship are to that tonnage as determined-
"
(a) in the case of a vessel of 24 metres in length or over, in accordance with the IMO International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships (ITC69);
"
(b) in the case of a vessel under 24 metres in length, in accordance with tonnage regulations.

(2) A ship shall not be treated as a qualifying ship for the purposes of this Schedule unless there is in force-

(a) a valid International Tonnage Certificate (1969), or

(b) a valid certificate recording its tonnage as measured in accordance with tonnage regulations.
"
(3) In this paragraph ""tonnage regulations"" means regulations under section 19 of the Merchant Shipping Act 1995 or provisions of the law of a country or territory outside the United Kingdom corresponding to those regulations.
"
+ мультитран:

Max Factor

6.05.2006 11:56

Тема сообщения: tonnage tax company

Пожалуйста, помогите перевести.

tonnage tax, если верить Мультитрану - корабельный сбор, а как это к company применить не представляю. компания, подлежащая обложению корабельным сбором?? - чушь какая-то...

Помогите, плиз!

Заранее спасибо Mt | Google

Codeater

6.05.2006 12:07
"
Tonnage Tax - это такой вид налогообложения судоходных компаний (пароходств), при котором размер налога рассчитывается в зависимости от чистой регистровой вместимости судов, составляющих флот компании (т.н. ""налог на тоннаж""). Tonnage tax company - компания подлежащая такому виду налогообложения.
"
Некоторые налоговые изменения коснутся мореходных компаний, для которых !подоходный налог! будет заменен на !налог с тоннажа! судна.

Англо-русский экономический словарь > tonnage tax company
26 AF

of

* * *

prep. w. dat.

I. Of place:

1) off, from;

G. hljóp af hesti sínum, G. jumped off his horse;

ganga af mótinu, to go away from the meeting;

Flosi kastaði af sér skikkjunni, threw off his cloak;

Gizzur gekk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from the south-west;

hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he had taken off his shoes;

Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off;

tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms;

bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus;

land af landi, from one land to the other;

hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession;

vil ek þú vinnir af þér skuldina, work off the debt;

muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand;

rísa af dauða, to rise from the dead;

vakna af draumi, to awaken from a dream;

lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse;

vindr stóð af landi, the wind blew from the land;

2) out of;

verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world;

gruflar hón af læknum, she scrambles out of the brook;

Otradalr var mjök af vegi, far out of the way.

Connected with út; föstudaginn fór út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town.

II. Of time; past, beyond:

af ómagaaldri, able to support oneself, of age;

ek em nú af léttasta skeiði, no longer in the prime of life;

þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, when seven weeks of summer are past;

var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past.

III. In various other relations:

1) þiggja lið af e-m, to receive help from one;

hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy;

vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of one;

féll þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s men fell there;

þá eru þeir útlagir ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their goðorð;

þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim;

ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to give up;

2) off, of;

höggva fót, hönd, af e-m, to cut off one’s foot, hand;

vil ek, at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, whatever you like of the stores;

þar lá forkr einn ok brotit af endanum, with the point broken off;

absol., beit hann höndina af, bit the hand off;

fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off;

3) of, among;

hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum, the most promising of the young men;

4) with;

hláða, (ferma) skip af e-u, to load (freight) a ship with;

fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring;

5) of (= ór which is more frequent);

húsit var gert af timbr stokkum, was built of trunks of trees;

6) fig., eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him;

hvat hefir þú gert af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar?;

7) denoting parentage, descent, origin;

ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, are descended from them;

kominn af Trójumönnum, descended from the Trojans;

8) by, of (after passive);

ek em sendr hingat af Starkaði, sent hither by;

ástsæll af landsmónnum, beloved of;

9) on account of, by reason of, by;

úbygðr at frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold;

ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds;

af ástæld hans, by his popularity;

af því, therefore;

af hví, wherefor why;

af því at, because;

10) by means of, by;

framfœra e-n af verkum sínum, by means of his own labour;

af sínu fé, by one’s own means;

absol., hann fekk af hina mestu sœmd, derived great honour from it;

11) with adjectives, in regard to;

mildr af fé, liberal of money;

góðr af griðum, merciful;

fastr af drykk, close (stingy) in regard to drink;

12) used absol. with a verb, off away;

hann bað hann þá róa af fjörðinn, to row the firth off;

ok er þeir höfðu af fjörðung, when they had covered one forth of the way;

sofa af nóttina, to sleep the night away.

* * *

prep. often used elliptically by dropping the case, or even merely adverbially, [Ulf. af; A. S. and Engl. of, off; Hel. ab; Germ. ab; Gr. άπό; Lat. a, ab.] With dat. denoting a motion a loco; one of the three prepp. af, ór, frá, corresponding to those in loco—á, í, við, and ad locum—á, í, at. It in general corresponds to the prepp. in loco—á, or in locum— til, whilst ór answers more to í; but it also frequently corresponds to yfir, um or í. It ranges between ór and frá, generally denoting the idea from the surface of, while ór means from the inner part, and frá from the outer part or border. The motion from a hill, plain, open place is thus denoted by af; by ór that from an enclosed space, depth, cavity, thus af fjalli, but ór of a valley, dale; af Englandi, but ór Danmörk, as mörk implies the notion of a deep wood, forest. The wind blows af landi, but a ship sets sail frá landi; frá landi also means a distance from: af hendi, of a glove, ring; ór hendi, of whatever has been kept in the hand (correl. to á hendi and í hendi). On the other hand af is more general, whilst frá and ór are of a more special character; frá denoting a departure, ór an impulse or force; a member goes home af þingi, whereas ór may denote an inmate of a district, or convey the notion of secession or exclusion from, Eb. 105 new Ed.; the traveller goes af landi, the exile ór landi: taka e-t af e-m is to take a thing out of one’s hand, that of taka frá e-m to remove out of one’s sight, etc. In general af answers to Engl. of, off, ór to out of, and frá to from: the Lat. prepp. ab, de, and ex do not exactly correspond to the Icelandic, yet as a rule ór may answer to ex, af sometimes to ab, sometimes to de. Of, off, from among; with, by; on account of by means of, because of concerning, in respect of.

A. Loc.

I. With motion, off, from:

1. prop. corresp. to á,

α. konungr dró gullhring af hendi sér (but á hendi), Ld. 32; Höskuldr lætr bera farm af skipi, unload the ship (but bera farm á skip), id.; var tekit af hestum þeirra, they were unsaddled, Nj. 4; Gunnarr hafði farit heiman af bæ sínum, he was away from home, 82; Gunnarr hljóp af hesti sínum, jumped off his horse (but hl. á hest), 83; hlaupa, stökkva af baki, id., 112, 264 ; Gunnarr skýtr til hans af boganum, from the bow, where af has a slight notion of instrumentality, 96; flýja af fundinum, to fly from off the battle-field, 102; ríða af Þríhyrningshálsum, 206; út af Langaholti, Eg. 744 ; sunnan ór Danmörk ok af Saxlandi, 560; ganga af mótinu, to go from the meeting, Fms. vii. 130; af þeirra fundi reis María upp ok fór, 625. 85 ; Flosi kastaði af ser skikkjunni, threw his cloak off him (but kasta á sik),Nj. 176; taka Hrungnis fót af honum, of a load, burden, Edda 58; land þat er hann fiskði af, from which he set off to fish, Grág. i. 151, is irregular, frá would suit better; slíta af baki e-s, from off one’s back, ii. 9 ; bera af borði, to clear the table, Nj. 75.

β. where it more nearly answers to í; þeir koma af hafi, of sailors coming in (but leggja í haf), Nj. 128 ; fara til Noregs af Orkneyjum (but í or til O.), 131; þeim Agli fórst vel ok komu af hafi i Borgarfjörð, Eg. 392 ; hann var útlagi ( outlawed) af Noregi, where ór would be more regular, 344; af Islandi, of a traveller, Fms. x. 3; búa her af báðum ríkjunum, to take a levy from, 51; hinir beztu bændr ór Norðlendingafjórðungi ok af Sunnlendingafjórðungi, the most eminent Southerners and Northerners, 113; Gizzurr gékk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from south-west, Sturl. ii. 219; prestar af hvárutveggja biskupsdæmi, from either diocess, Dipl. ii. 11; verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world, 623. 21; gruflar hon af læknum, scrambles out of the brook, Ísl. ii. 340; Egill kneyfði af horninu í einum drykk, drained off the horn at one draught, literally squeezed every drop out of it, Eg. 557; brottuaf herbúðunurn, Fms. x. 343.

γ. of things more or less surrounding the subject, corresp. to yfir or um; láta þeir þegar af sér tjöldin, break off, take down the tents in preparing for battle, Eg. 261; kyrtillinn rifnaði af honum, his coat burst, caused by the swollen body, 602; hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he untied his shoes (but binda á sik), 716; Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off, of one clinging to one’s body, 747; tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms, Fms. vii. 39. Of putting off clothes; fara af kápu, Nj. 143; far þú eigi af brynjunni, Bs. i. 541; þá ætlaði Sigurðr at fara af brynjunni, id.; þá var Skarphéðinn flettr af klæðunum, Nj. 209: now more usually fara or klæðum, fötum, exuere, to undress.

δ. connected with út; föstudaginn for út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town, Nj. 274; ganga út af kirkjunni, to go out of the church, now út úr, Fms. vii. 107: drekki hann af þeirri jörðunni, of something impregnated with the earth, Laekn. 402.

ε. more closely corresponding to frá, being in such cases a Latinism (now frá); bréf af páfa, a pope’s bull, Fms. x. 6; rit af hánum, letter from him, 623. 52; bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus, Bs. i. 712; farið þér á brautu af mér í eilífan eld, Hom. 143; brott af drottins augliti, Stj. 43.

ζ. denoting an uninterrupted continuity, in such phrases as land aflandi, from land to land, Eg. 343, Fas. ii. 539; skip af skipl. from ship to ship, Fms. v. 10; brann hvat af öðru, one after another, of an increasing fire, destroying everything, i. 128; brandr af brandi brenn, funi kveykist af funa, one from another, Hm. 56; hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession, also hverr at öðrum, Eb. 272, 280 (where at in both passages).

2. metaph., at ganga af e-m dauðum, to go from, leave one dead on the spot, of two combatants; en hann segiz bani hins ef hann gekk af dauðum manni, Grág. ii. 88, Hkr. 1. 327; undr þykir mér er bróðir þinn vildi eigi taka af þér starf þetta, would not take this toil from thee, Nj. 77; þegnar hans glöddust af honum, were fain of him, Fms. x. 380; at koma þeim manni af sér er settr var á fé hans, to get rid of, Ld. 52; vil ek þú vinriir af þér skuldina, work off the debt, Njarð. 366; reka af sér, to repel, Sturl. ii. 219; hann á þá sonu er aldri munu af oss ganga, who will never leave us, whom we shall never get rid of, Fas. i. 280; leysa e-n af e-u, to relieve, 64; taka e-n af lífi, to kill, Eg. 48, 416, Nj. 126; af lífdögum, Fms. vii. 204; ek mun ná lögum af því máli, get the benefit of the law in this case, Eg. 468; muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand, 414; rísa af dauða, to rise from death, Fms. ii. 142; guð bætti honum þó af þessi sótt, healed him of this sickness, ix. 390; vakna af sýn, draumi, svefni, to awaken from a vision, dream, sleep, 655 xxxii. I, Gísl. 24, Eb. 192, Fas. i. 41. Rather with the notion out of, in the phrase af sér etc., e. g. sýna e-t af scr, to shew, exhibit a disposition for or against, Ld. 18; gera mikit af sér, to shew great prowess, Ísl. ii. 368; éf þú gerir eigi meira af þér um aðra leika, unless you make more of thyself, Edda 32; Svipdagr hafði mikit af sér gert, fought bravely, Fas. i. 41; góðr (illr) af sér, good ( bad) of oneself, by nature; mikill af sjálfum sér, proud, bold, stout, Nj. 15; ágætastr maðr af sjálfum sér, the greatest hero, Bret.: góðr af ser, excellent, Hrafn. 7; but, on the contrary, af sér kominn, ruinous, in decay; this phrase is used of old houses or buildings, as in Bs. i. 488 = Sturl. l. c.; af sér kominn af mæði can also be said of a man fallen off from what he used to be; kominn af fotum fram, off his legs from age, Sturl. i. 223, Korm. 154 (in a verse).

II. WITHOUT MOTION:

1. denoting direction from, but at the same time continuous connection with an object from which an act or thing proceeds, from; tengja skip hvárt fram af stafni annars, to tie the ships in a line, stem to stern, Fms. i. 157, xi. 111; svá at þeir tóku út af borðum, jutted out of the boards, of rafters or poles, iv. 49; stjarna ok af sem skaft, of a comet, ix. 482; lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse, Grág. ii. 264; hon svarar af sínu sæti sem álpt af baru, Fás. i. 186; þar er sjá mátti utau af firði, af þjóðleið, that might be seen from the fareway on the sea when sailing in the firth, Hkr. ii. 64; þá mun hringt af (better at) Burakirkju, of bells rung at the church, Fms. xi. 160; gengr þar af Meðalfellsströnd, projects from, juts out, of a promontory, Ld. 10.

2. denoting direction alone; upp af víkinni stóð borg mikil, a burg inland from the inlet, Eg. 161; lokrekkja innar af seti, a shut bed inward from the benches in the hall, Ísl. ii. 262; kapella upp af konungs herbergjum, upwards from, Fms. x. 153; vindr stóð af landi, the wind stood off the land, Bárð. 166.

β. metaph., stauda af e-u, vide VI. 4.

γ. ellipt., hallaði af norðr, of the channel, north of a spot, Boll. 348; also, austr af, suðr af, vestr af, etc.

3. denoting absence; þingheyendr skulu eigi vera um nótt af þingi ( away from the meeting), eðr lengr, þá eru þeir af þingi ( away from (be meeting) ef þeir eru or ( out of) þingmarki, Grág. i. 25; vera um nótt af várþingi, 115; meðan hann er af landi héðan, abroad, 150.

β. metaph., gud hvíldi af öllum verkum sínum á sjaunda degi, rested from his labours, Ver. 3.

4. denoting distance; þat er komit af þjóðleið, out of the high road, remote, Eg. 369; af þjóðbraut, Grág. ii. 264, i. 15; Otradalr (a farm) var mjök af vegi, far out of the way, Háv. 53.

B. TEMP, past, from, out of, beyond:

1. of a person’s age, in the sense of having past a period of life; af ómaga aldri, of age, able to support oneself, Grág. i. 243; af aeskualdri, stricken in years, having past the prime of life, Eg. 202; lítið af barnsaldri, still a child, Ld. 74; ek em nú af léttasia skeiði, no longer in the prime of life, Háv. 40.

2. of a part or period of time, past; eigi síðar en nótt er af þingi, a night of the session past, Grág. i. 101; þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, seven weeks past of the summer, 182; tíu vikur af sumri, Íb. 10; var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past, Háv. 41; mikið af vetri, much of the winter was past, Fas. ii. 186; þriðjungr af nótt, a third of the night past, Fms. x. 160; stund af degi, etc.; tveir mánoðr af sumri, Gþl. 103.

3. in adverbial phrases such as, af stundu, soon; af bragði, at once; af tómi, at leisure, at ease; af nýju, again; af skyndingu, speedily; af bráðungu, in a hurry, etc.

C. In various other relations:

I. denoting the passage or transition of an object, concrete or abstract, of, from.

1. where a thing is received, derived from, conferred by a person or object; þiggja lið af e-m, to derive help from, Edda 26; taka traust af e-m, to receive support, comfort from, Fms. xi. 243; taka mála af e-m, to be in one’s pay, of a soldier, Eg. 266; halda land af e-m, to hold land of any one, 282; verða viss af e-m, to get information from, 57, Nj. 130; taka við sök af manni (a law term), to undertake a case, suit, Grág. i. 142; hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy, ii. 374; vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of, Vd. 88 (old Ed., the new reads frá), Fs. 45; afla matar af eyjum, to derive supplies from, Eb. 12.

2. where an object is taken by force:

α. prop. out of a person’s hand; þú skalt hnykkja smíðit af honum, wrest it out of his hand, Nj. 32; cp. taka, þrífa, svipta e-u (e-t) af e-m, to wrest from.

β. metaph. of a person’s deprival of anything in general; hann tók af þér konuna, carried thy wife off, Nj. 33; tók Gunnarr af þér sáðland þitt, robbed thee of seedland, 103; taka af honum tignina, to depose, degrade him, Eg. 271; vinna e-t af e-m, to carry off by force of arms, conquer, Fms. iii. 29; drepa menn af e-m, for one, slay one’s man, Eg. 417; fell þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s people fell there, 261.

γ. in such phrases as, hyggja af e-u (v. afhuga), hugsa af e-u, to forget; hyggja af harmi; sjá af e-u, to lose, miss; var svá ástúðigt með þeim, at livargi þóttist mega af öðrum sjá, neither of them could take his eyes off the other, Sturl. i. 194; svá er mörg við ver sinn vær, at varla um sér hon af hoiuun nær, Skálda 163.

3. denoting forfeiture; þá eru þeir útlagir, ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their priesthood, Grág. i. 24; telja hann af ráðunum fjár síns alls, to oust one, on account of idiocy or madness, 176; verða af kaupi, to be off the bargain, Edda 26; þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim, Nj. 15; ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to forfeit, a case of divorce, id.; ella er hann af rettarfari um hana, has forfeited the suit, Grág. i. 381.

β. ellipt., af ferr eindagi ef, is forfeited, Grág. i. 140.

II. denoting relation of a part to a whole, off, of, Lat. de; höggva hönd, höfuð, fót af e-um, to cut one’s hand, head, foot off, Nj. 97, 92, Bs. i. 674; höggva spjót af skapti, to sever the blade from the shaft, 264; hann lét þá ekki hafa af föðurarfi sínum, nothing of their patrimony, Eg. 25; vil ek at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, take what you like of the stores, Nj. 4; at þú eignist slíkt af fé okkru sem þú vili, 94.

β. ellipt., en nú höfum vér kjörit, en þat er af krossinum, a slice of, Fms. vii. 89; Þórðr gaf Skólm frænda sínum af landnámi sínu, a part of, Landn. 211; hafði hann þat af hans eigu er hann vildi, Sturl. ii. 169; þar lá forkr einn ok brotið af endanum, the point broken off, Háv. 24, Sturl. i. 169.

γ. absol. off; beit hann höndina af, þar sem nú heitir úlfliðr, bit the hand off, Edda 17; fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off, Nj. 97; jafnt er sem þér synist, af er fótrinn, the foot is off, id.; af bæði eyru, both ears off, Vm. 29.

2. with the notion of—among; mestr skörungr af konum á Norðrlöndum, the greatest heroine in the North, Fms. i. 116; hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum í Austfjörðum, the most hopeful of youths in the Eastfirths, Njarð. 364; af ( among) öllurn hirðmönnuni virði konungr mest skáld sín, Eg. 27; ef hann vildi nokkura kaupa af þessum konum, Ld. 30; ör liggr þar útiá vegginum, ok er sú af þeirra örum, one of their own arrows, Nj. 115.

β. from, among, belonging to; guð kaus hana af ollum konum sér til móður, of the Virgin Mary, Mar. A. i. 27.

γ. metaph., kunna mikit (lítið) af e-u, to know much, little of, Bragi kann mest af skáldskap, is more cunning of poetry than any one else, Edda 17.

δ. absol. out of, before, in preference to all others; Gunnarr bauð þér góð boð, en þú vildir eingi af taka, you would choose none of them, Nj. 77; ráða e-t af, to decide; þó mun faðir minn mestu af ráða, all depends upon him, Ld. 22; konungr kveðst því mundu heldr af trúa, preferred believing that of the two, Eg. 55; var honum ekki vildara af ván, he could expect nothing better, 364.

3. with the additional sense of instrumentality, with; ferma skip af e-u, to freight a ship with, Eg. 364; hlaða mörg skip af korni, load many ships with corn, Fms. xi. 8; klyfja tvá hesta af mat, Nj. 74; var vágrinn skipaðr af herskipum, the bay was covered with war ships, 124; fylla ker af glóðum, fill it with embers, Stj. 319; fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring, Ver. 3.

III. denoting the substance of which a thing is made, of; used indifferently with ór, though ór be more frequent; þeir gerðu af honum jörðina, af blóði hans sæinn ok vötnin, of the creation of the world from the corpse of the giant Ymir; the poem Gm. 40, 41, constantly uses ór in this sense, just as in modern Icelandic, Edda 5; svá skildu þeir, at allir hlutir væri smíðaðir af nokkru efni, 147 (pref.); húsit var gert af timbrstokkum, built of trunks of timber, Eg. 233; hjöhin vóru af gulli, of gold, golden, Fms. i. 17; af osti, of cheese, but in the verse 1. c. ór osti, Fms. vi. 253; línklæði af lérepti, linen, Sks. 287.

2. metaph. in the phrases, göra e-t af e-n ( to dispose of), verða af ( become of), hvat hefir þú gört af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar? Njarð. 376; hvat af motrinuni er orðit, what has become of it? of a lost thing, Ld. 208; hverfr Óspakr á burt, svá eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him? Band. 5.

IV. denoting parentage, descent, origin, domicile, abode:

1. parentage, of, from, used indifferently with frá; ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, descend from them, but a little below—frá honum eru konmir Sturlungar, Eb. 338, cp. afkvæmi; af ætt Hörðakára, Fms. i. 287; kominn af Trojumönnum, xi. 416; af Ása-ætt (Kb. wrongly at), Edda I.

β. metaph., vera af Guði (theol.), of God, = righteous, 686 B. 9; illr ávöxtr af íllri rót, Fms. ii. 48; Asia er kölluð af nafni nokkurar konu, derives her name from, Stj. 67; af honum er bragr kallaðr skáldskapr, called after his name, Edda 17.

2. of domicile; af danskri tungu, of Danish or Scandinavian origin, speaking the Danish tongue, Grág. ii. 73; hvaðan af löndum, whence, native of what country? Ísl.

β. especially denoting a man’s abode, and answering to á and í, the name of the farm (or country) being added to proper names, (as in Scotland,) to distinguish persons of the same name; Hallr af Síðu, Nj. 189; Erlingr af Straumey, 273; Ástríðr af Djúpárbakka, 39; Gunnarr af Hlíðarenda (more usual frá); þorir haklangr konungr af Ögðum, king of Agdir, Eg. 35, etc.; cp. ór and frá.

V. denoting a person with whom an act, feeling, etc. originates, for the most part with a periphrastic passive:

1. by, the Old Engl. of; as, ek em sendr hingað af Starkaði ok sonum hans, sent hither by, Nj. 94; inna e-t af hendi, to perform, 257; þó at alþýða væri skírð af kennimönnum, baptized of, Fms. ii. 158; meira virðr af mönnum, higher esteemed, Ld. 158; ástsæll af landsmönnum, beloved, íb. 16; vinsæll af mönnum, Nj. 102; í allgóðu yfirlæti af þeim feðgum, hospitably treated by them, Eg. 170; var þá nokkut drukkið af alþjóð, there was somewhat hard drinking of the people, Sturl. iii. 229; mun þat ekki upp tekið af þeim sükudólgum mínum, they will not clutch at that, Nj. 257; ef svá væri í hendr þér búit af mér, if í had so made everything ready to thy hands, Ld. 130; þá varð fárætt um af föður hans, his father said little about it, Fms. ii. 154.

2. it is now also sometimes used as a periphrase of a nom., e. g. ritað, þýtt af e-m, written, translated, edited by, but such phrases scarcely occur in old writers.

VI. denoting cause, ground, reason:

1. originating from, on account of, by reason of; af frændsemis sökum, for kinship’s sake, Grág. ii. 72; ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds, 27; af manna völdum, by violence, not by natural accident, of a crime, Nj. 76; af fortölum Halls, through his pleading, 255; af ástsæld hans ok af tölum þeirra Sæmundar, by his popularity and the eloquence of S., Íb. 16; af ráðum Haralds konungs, by his contriving, Landn. 157; úbygðr af frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold, Hkr. i. 5.

β. adverbially, af því, therefore, Nj. 78; af hví, why? 686 B. 9; þá verðr bóndi heiðinn af barni sínu, viz. if he does not cause his child to be christened, K. Þ. K. 20.

2. denoting instrumentality, by means of; af sinu fé, by one’s own means, Grág. i. 293; framfæra e-n af verkum sinum, by means of one’s own labour, K. Þ. K. 142; draga saman auð af sökum, ok vælum ok kaupum, make money by, 623. I; af sínum kostnaði, at hi s own expense, Hkr. i. 217.

β. absol., hún fellir á mik dropa svá heita at ek brenn af öll, Ld. 328; hann fékk af hina mestu sæmd, derived great honotur from it, Nj. 88; elli sótti á hendr honum svá at hann lagðist í rekkju af, he grew bedridden from age, Ld. 54; komast undan af hlaupi, escape by running, Fms. viii. 58; spinna garn af rokki, spin off a wheel (now, spinna á rokk), from a notion of instrumentality, or because of the thread being spun out (?), Eb. 92.

3. denoting proceeding, originating from; lýsti af höndum hennar, her hands spread beams of light, Edda 22; allir heimar lýstust ( were illuminated) af henni, id.; en er lýsti af degi, when the day broke forth, Fms. ii. 16; lítt var lýst af degi, the day was just beginning to break, Ld. 46; þá tók at myrkja af nótt, the ‘mirk-time’ of night began to set in, Eg. 230; tók þá brátt at myrkva af nótt, the night grew dark, Hkr. ii. 230.

4. metaph., standa, leiða, hljótast af, to be caused by, result from; opt hlýtst íllt af kvenna hjali, great mischief is wrought by women’s gossip (a proverb), Gísl. 15, 98; at af þeim mundi mikit mein ok úhapp standa, be caused by, Edda 18; kenna kulda af ráðum e-s, to feel sore from, Eb. 42; þó mun her hljótast af margs manns bani, Nj, 90.

5. in adverbial phrases, denoting state of mind; af mikilli æði, in fury, Nj. 116; af móð, in great emotion, Fms. xi. 221; af áhyggju, with concern, i. 186; af létta, frankly, iii. 91; af viti, collectedly, Grág. ii. 27; af heilu, sincerely, Eg. 46; áf fári, in rage; af æðru, timidly, Nj. (in a verse); af setning, composedly, in tune, Fms. iii. 187; af mikilli frægð, gallantly, Fas. i. 261; af öllu afli, with all might, Grág. ii. 41; af riki, violently, Fbr. (in a verse); af trúnaði, confidently, Grág. i. 400.

VII. denoting regard to, of, concerning, in respect of, as regards:

1. with verbs, denoting to tell of, be informed, inquire about, Lat. de; Dioscorides segir af grasi því, speaks of, 655 xxx. 5; er menn spurðu af landinu, inquired about it, Landn. 30; halda njósn af e-u, Nj. 104; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, Eg. 546, Band. 8.

β. absol., hann mun spyrja, hvárt þér sé nokkut af kunnigt hversu for með okkr, whether you know anything about, how, Nj. 33; halda skóla af, to hold a school in a science, 656 A. i. 19 (sounds like a Latinism); en ek gerða þik sera mestan mann af öllu, in respect of all, that you should get all the honour of it, Nj. 78.

2. with adjectives such as mildr, illr, góðrafe-u, denoting disposition or character in respect to; alira manna mildastr af fo, very liberal, often-banded, Fms. vii. 197; mildr af gulli, i. 33; góðr af griðum, merciful, Al. 33; íllr af mat en mildr af gulli, Fms. i. 53; fastr af drykk, close, stingy in regard to, Sturl. ii. 125; gat þess Hildigunnr at þú mundir góðr af hestinum, that you would be good about the horse, Nj. 90, cp. auðigr at, v. at, which corresponds to the above phrases; cp. also the phrase af sér above, p. 4, col. I, ll. 50 sqq.

VIII. periphrasis of a genitive (rare); provincialis af öllum Predikaraklaustrum, Fms. x. 76; vera af hinum mesta fjandskap, to breathe deep hatred to, be on bad terms with, ix. 220; af hendi, af hálfu e-s, on one’s behalf, v. those words.

IX. in adverbial phrases; as, af launungu, secretly; af hljóði, silently; v. those words.

β. also used absolutely with a verb, almost adverbially, nearly in the signification off, away; hann bað þá róa af fjörðinn, pass the firth swiftly by rowing, row the firth off, Fms. ix. 502; var pá af farit þat seni skerjóttast var, was past, sailed past, Ld. 142; ok er þeir höfðu af fjórðung, past one fourth of the way, Dropl. 10: skína af, to clear up, of the skv, Eb. 152; hence in common language, skína af sér, when the sun breaks forth: sofa af nóttina, to sleep it away, Fms. ii. 98; leið af nóttin, the night past away, Nj. 53; dvelja af stundir, to kill the time, Band. 8; drepa af, to kill; láta af, to slaughter, kill off;

γ. in exclamations; af tjöldin, off with the awnings, Bs. i. 420, Fins, ix. 49.

δ. in the phrases, þar af, thence; hér af, hence, Fms. ii. 102; af fram, straight on, Nj. 144; now, á fram, on, advance.

X. it often refers to a whole sentence or to an adverb, not only like other prepp. to hér, hvar, þar, but also redundantly to hvaðan, héðan, þaðan, whence, hence, thence.

2. the preposition may sometimes be repeated, once elliptically or adverbially, and once properly, e. g. en er af var borit at borðinu, the cloth was taken off from the table, Nj. 176; Guð þerrir af (off, away) hvert tár af ( from) augum heilagra manna, God wipes off every tear from the eyes of his saints, 655 xx. vii. 17; skal þó fyrst bætr af lúka af fé vegaiula, pay off, from, Gþl. 160, the last af may be omitted—var þá af borið borðinu—and the prep. thus be separated from its case, or it may refer to some of the indecl. relatives er or sem, the prep. hvar, hér, þar being placed behind them without a case, and referring to the preceding relative, e. g. oss er þar mikit af sagt auð þeim, we have been told much about these riches, Band. 24; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, in short, shortly. Eg. 546; þaðan af veit ek, thence í infer, know, Fms. i. 97.

XI. it is moreover connected with a great many verbs besides those mentioned above, e. g. bera af, to excel, whence afbragð, afbrigði; draga af, to detract, deduct, hence afdráttr; veita ekki af, to be hard with; ganga at, to be left, hence afgangr; standast af um e-t, to stand, how matters stand; sem af tekr, at a furious rate; vita af, to be conscious, know about (vide VII).

D. As a prefix to compounds distinction is to be made between:

I. af privativum, denoting diminution, want, deduction, loss, separation, negation of, etc., answering indifferently to Lat. ab-, de-, ex-, dis-, and rarely to re- and se-, v. the following COMPDS, such as segja, dicere, but afsegja, negare; rækja, colere, but afrækja, negligere; aflaga, contra legem; skapligr, normalis, afskapligr, deformis; afvik, recessus; afhús, afhellir, afdalr, etc.

II. af intensivum, etymologically different, and akin to of, afr-, e. g. afdrykkja = ofdrykkja, inebrietas; afbrýði, jealously; afbendi, tenesmus; afglapi, vir fatuus, etc. etc. Both the privative and the intensive af may be contracted into á, esp. before a labial f, m, v, e. g. á fram = af fram; ábrýði = afbrýði; ávöxtr = afvöxtr; áburðr = afburðr; ávíta = afvíta (?). In some cases dubious. With extenuated and changed vowel; auvirðiligr or övirðiligr, depreciated, = afv- etc., v. those words.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AF
27 enlace

m.

1 link (conexión) (gen) & (computing).

2 go-between (person).

enlace sindical shop steward (peninsular Spanish)

3 bond (chemistry).

4 connection.

estación de enlace junction

vía de enlace crossover

pres.subj.

3^rd person singular (él/ella/ello) Present Subjunctive of Spanish verb: enlazar.

* * *

enlace

► nombre masculino

1 (conexión) link, connection

2 (boda) marriage

3 (tren etc) connection

4 (intermediario) liaison, link

5 QUÍMICA bond

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

establecer un enlace to forge a link

servir de enlace to provide a link

enlace sindical shop steward, US union delegate

estación de enlace junction 2 (metro) connecting station

vía de enlace crossover

* * *

noun m.

1) link, connection

2) liaison

* * *

SM

1) (=relación) connection, relationship

2) (=conexión) (Elec) linkage; (Quím) bond; (Ferro) connection; [de vías] crossover; [en autopista] motorway junction; (Mil) liaison

los buques no lograron efectuar el enlace en el punto indicado — the ships did not manage to rendezvous at the spot indicated

estación de enlace — junction

enlace fijo — fixed link

enlace telefónico — telephone link-up

3) (=matrimonio) (tb: enlace matrimonial) marriage

el enlace de las dos familias — the linking of the two families by marriage

4) (=mediador) link, go-between

enlace sindical — shop steward

5) (Internet) link

enlace de datos — (Inform) data link

* * *

masculino

1)

a) (conexión, unión) link

enlace telefónico/por satélite — telephone/satellite link

b) (de vías, carreteras) intersection, junction

- enlace en trébol

2) (frml) ( casamiento) tb

enlace matrimonial — marriage

3) ( persona) liaison

actúa de enlace entre... — he acts as liaison o as a link between...

- enlace sindical

4) (Quím) linkage, bond

* * *

= interfixing, link, linkage, pointer, bridge, bonding, liaison, bond, link-up, relay point, nexus.

Ex. The device known as links (sometimes referred to as 'interfixing') simply indicates that some connection exists between two or more terms (ie concepts) in a particular document.

Ex. Explanatory references give a little more explanation as to why the link between two names is being made in the catalogue or index.

Ex. We have just stated that the linkage of varying titles and varying forms of entry have to be done on the same basis in an automated situation as in a manual situation.

Ex. Note also, that the subdivided heading MUSIC -- AUSTRIA consists only of two pointers.

Ex. My own definition of 'Hypermedia' is a system whereby audiovisual 'statements' can be used as bridges between materials that are conceptually related in some way.

Ex. The authors suggest that there should be a bonding between and among governing agencies and local schools.

Ex. It is important to make sure that there is close liaison between the cataloguing department and the order department, otherwise cards are liable to be ordered twice or in insufficient quantity to meet the total demand.

Ex. Networking creates bonds where none may have existed and multiplies individual capabilities manifold.

Ex. Today the link-up with television is obviously very useful indeed.

Ex. These information centres function as ports of first call for officials stationed nearby, and also as relay points to the central collections.

Ex. The author explores the nexus between record keeping and the execution of government 'watchdog' functions.

----

* deterioro de los enlaces = link rot.

* enlace cita = backlink.

* enlace cita, enlace referencia, enlace de referencia = backlink.

* enlace de comunicaciones = communications link.

* enlace de comunicaciones vía satélite = satellite link.

* enlace de referencia = backlink.

* enlace de telecomunicaciones = telecommunications link.

* enlace hipertextual inserto = embedded link.

* enlace obsoleto = broken link, dead link.

* enlace químico = chemical bond.

* enlace referencia = backlink, outlink [out-link].

* enlace referente = backlink, inlink [in-link].

* enlace roto = broken link, dead link.

* enlaces a sitios web = sitation.

* puerta en enlace = gateway.

* solventador de enlace = resolver.

* vuelo de enlace = connecting flight.

* * *

masculino

1)

a) (conexión, unión) link

enlace telefónico/por satélite — telephone/satellite link

b) (de vías, carreteras) intersection, junction

- enlace en trébol

2) (frml) ( casamiento) tb

enlace matrimonial — marriage

3) ( persona) liaison

actúa de enlace entre... — he acts as liaison o as a link between...

- enlace sindical

4) (Quím) linkage, bond

* * *

= interfixing, link, linkage, pointer, bridge, bonding, liaison, bond, link-up, relay point, nexus.

Ex: The device known as links (sometimes referred to as 'interfixing') simply indicates that some connection exists between two or more terms (ie concepts) in a particular document.

Ex: Explanatory references give a little more explanation as to why the link between two names is being made in the catalogue or index.

Ex: We have just stated that the linkage of varying titles and varying forms of entry have to be done on the same basis in an automated situation as in a manual situation.

Ex: Note also, that the subdivided heading MUSIC -- AUSTRIA consists only of two pointers.

Ex: My own definition of 'Hypermedia' is a system whereby audiovisual 'statements' can be used as bridges between materials that are conceptually related in some way.

Ex: The authors suggest that there should be a bonding between and among governing agencies and local schools.

Ex: It is important to make sure that there is close liaison between the cataloguing department and the order department, otherwise cards are liable to be ordered twice or in insufficient quantity to meet the total demand.

Ex: Networking creates bonds where none may have existed and multiplies individual capabilities manifold.

Ex: Today the link-up with television is obviously very useful indeed.

Ex: These information centres function as ports of first call for officials stationed nearby, and also as relay points to the central collections.

Ex: The author explores the nexus between record keeping and the execution of government 'watchdog' functions.

* deterioro de los enlaces = link rot.

* enlace cita = backlink.

* enlace cita, enlace referencia, enlace de referencia = backlink.

* enlace de comunicaciones = communications link.

* enlace de comunicaciones vía satélite = satellite link.

* enlace de referencia = backlink.

* enlace de telecomunicaciones = telecommunications link.

* enlace hipertextual inserto = embedded link.

* enlace obsoleto = broken link, dead link.

* enlace químico = chemical bond.

* enlace referencia = backlink, outlink [out-link].

* enlace referente = backlink, inlink [in-link].

* enlace roto = broken link, dead link.

* enlaces a sitios web = sitation.

* puerta en enlace = gateway.

* solventador de enlace = resolver.

* vuelo de enlace = connecting flight.

* * *

enlace

masculine

A

1 (conexión, unión) link

enlace telefónico telephone link

enlace por or vía satélite satellite link

el enlace ferroviario/aéreo entre las dos ciudades the rail/air link between the two cities

una partícula de enlace a linking o connecting particle

2 (de vías, carreteras) intersection, junction

Compuestos:

● enlace web

( Inf) weblink

● enlace en trébol

cloverleaf

B ( frml) (casamiento) tb

enlace matrimonial marriage

C (persona) liaison

actúa de enlace entre … he acts as liaison o as a link between …, he liaises between … ( BrE)

Compuesto:

enlace sindical

masculine and feminine ( Esp) shop steward, union rep

D ( Quím) linkage, bond

* * *

Del verbo enlazar: ( conjugate enlazar)

enlacé es:

1ª persona singular (yo) pretérito indicativo

enlace es:

1ª persona singular (yo) presente subjuntivo

3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) presente subjuntivo

3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) imperativo

Multiple Entries:
enlace
enlazar
enlace sustantivo masculino
a) (conexión, unión) link

b) (de vías, carreteras) intersection, junction

c) tb

◊ enlace matrimonial marriage

d) ( persona) liaison;

◊ enlace sindical (Esp) shop steward, union rep

enlazar ( conjugate enlazar) verbo transitivo
1
a) ‹ ciudades› to link (up);

‹ideas/temas› to link, connect
b) ‹ cintas› to tie … together

2 (Col, RPl) ‹res/caballo› to lasso, rope (AmE)
3 (Méx frml) ( casar) to marry
verbo intransitivo enlace con algo [tren/vuelo] to connect with sth;
[ carretera] to link up with sth
enlace sustantivo masculino
1 (relación, ligazón) link, connection
enlace químico, chemical bond
2 frml (boda) wedding
3 (persona de contacto) liaison
4 Ferroc connection
5 (de carreteras, autopistas) intersection, junction
enlazar verbo transitivo & verbo intransitivo to link [con, with/to], connect [con, with]
' enlace' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
boda
- comunicación
- nexo
English:
connection
- liaison
- link
- union
- interchange
- liaise
- rep
- shuttle

* * *

enlace nm

1. [conexión] link;

el enlace ferroviario/aéreo entre París y Madrid the rail/air link between Paris and Madrid;

un enlace vía satélite a satellite link o hook-up

2. Informát [de hipertexto] link

3. [persona] go-between;

sirvió de enlace en las negociaciones he acted as mediator in the negotiations

Comp
Esp enlace sindical shop steward
4. Ferroc [empalme] connection;

estación de enlace junction;

vía de enlace crossover, crossing

5. Quím bond

Comp
enlace covalente covalent bond;
enlace de hidrógeno hydrogen bond;

enlace iónico ionic bond;

enlace químico chemical bond

6. Formal [boda]
enlace (matrimonial) marriage

* * *

enlace

m link, connection

* * *

enlace nm

1) : bond, link, connection

2) : liaison

* * *

enlace n

1. (conexión) link / connection

no hay enlace entre las dos partes de la película there's no link between the two parts of the film

2. (autobús, tren) connection

hay tres enlaces al día there are three connections a day

3. (boda) marriage

Spanish-English dictionary > enlace
28 Taylor, David Watson

SUBJECT AREA: Ports and shipping

[br]

b. 4 March 1864 Louisa County, Virginia, USA

d. 29 July 1940 Washington, DC, USA

[br]

American hydrodynamicist and Rear Admiral in the United States Navy Construction Corps.

[br]

Taylor's first years were spent on a farm in Virginia, but at the age of 13 he went to RandolphMacon College, graduating in 1881, and from there to the US Naval Academy, Annapolis. He graduated at the head of his class, had some sea time, and then went to the Royal Naval College in Greenwich, England, where in 1888 he again came top of the class with the highest-ever marks of any student, British or overseas.

On his return to the United States he held various posts as a constructor, ending this period at the Mare Island Navy Yard in California. In 1894 he was transferred to Washington, where he joined the Bureau of Construction and started to interest the Navy in ship model testing. Under his direction, the first ship model tank in the United States was built at Washington and for fourteen years operated under his control. The work of this establishment gave him the necessary information to write the highly acclaimed text The Speed and Power of Ships, which with revisions is still in use. By the outbreak of the First World War he was one of the world's most respected naval architects, and had been retained as a consultant by the British Government in the celebrated case of the collision between the White Star Liner Olympic and HMS Hawke.

In December 1914 Taylor became a Rear-Admiral and was appointed Chief Constructor of the US Navy. His term of office was extremely stressful, with over 1,000 ships constructed for the war effort and with the work of the fledgling Bureau for Aeronautics also under his control. The problems were not over in 1918 as the Washington Treaty required drastic pruning of the Navy and a careful reshaping of the defence force.

Admiral Taylor retired from active service at the beginning of 1923 but retained several consultancies in aeronautics, shipping and naval architecture. For many years he served as consultant to the ship-design company now known as Gibbs and Cox. Many honours came his way, but the most singular must be the perpetuation of his name in the David Taylor Medal, the highest award of the Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers in the United States. Similarly, the Navy named its ship test tank facility, which was opened in Maryland in 1937, the David W. Taylor Model Basin.

[br]

Principal Honours and Distinctions

President, Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers 1925–7. United States Distinguished Service Medal. American Society of Civil Engineers John Fritz Medal. Institution of Naval Architects Gold Medal 1894 (the first American citizen to receive it). Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers David W.Taylor Medal 1936 (the first occasion of this award).

Bibliography

Resistance of Ships and Screw Propulsion. 1911, The Speed and Power of Ships, New York: Wiley.

Taylor gave many papers to the Maritime Institutions of both the United States and the United Kingdom.

FMW

Biographical history of technology > Taylor, David Watson
29 Historical Portugal

   Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.

   A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.

   Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140

   The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."

   In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.

   The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.

   Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385

   Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in

   Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.

   The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.

   Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580

   The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.

   The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.

   What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.

   By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.

   Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.

   The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.

   By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.

   In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.

   Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640

   Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.

   Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.

   On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.

   Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822

   Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.

   Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.

   In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the

   Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.

   Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.

   Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.

   Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910

   During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.

   Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.

   Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.

   Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.

   Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.

   As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.

   First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26

   Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.

   The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.

   Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.

   The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74

   During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."

   Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.

   For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),

   and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.

   The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.

   With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.

   During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.

   The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.

   At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.

   The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.

   Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76

   Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.

   Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.

   In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.

   In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.

   In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.

   The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until

   UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.

   Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000

   After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.

   From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.

   Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.

   Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.

   In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.

   In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.

   Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.

    Contemporary Portugal

   Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.

   The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.

   Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.

   Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).

   All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.

   The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.

   After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.

   Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.

   Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.

   From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.

   Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.

   In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.

   An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal
30 knot

[not] 1. noun
1) (a lump or join made in string, rope etc by twisting the ends together and drawing tight the loops formed: She fastened the string round the parcel, tying it with a knot.) knude

2) (a lump in wood at the join between a branch and the trunk: This wood is full of knots.) knude

3) (a group or gathering: a small knot of people) klynge

4) (a measure of speed for ships (about 1.85 km per hour).) knob
2. verb
(to tie in a knot: He knotted the rope around the post.) binde knude

- knotty

* * *
[not] 1. noun
1) (a lump or join made in string, rope etc by twisting the ends together and drawing tight the loops formed: She fastened the string round the parcel, tying it with a knot.) knude

2) (a lump in wood at the join between a branch and the trunk: This wood is full of knots.) knude

3) (a group or gathering: a small knot of people) klynge

4) (a measure of speed for ships (about 1.85 km per hour).) knob
2. verb
(to tie in a knot: He knotted the rope around the post.) binde knude

- knotty

English-Danish dictionary > knot
31 line

I 1. noun
1) ((a piece of) thread, cord, rope etc: She hung the washing on the line; a fishing-rod and line.) snor; line

2) (a long, narrow mark, streak or stripe: She drew straight lines across the page; a dotted/wavy line.) streg; linie

3) (outline or shape especially relating to length or direction: The ship had very graceful lines; A dancer uses a mirror to improve his line.) linie

4) (a groove on the skin; a wrinkle.) rynke

5) (a row or group of objects or persons arranged side by side or one behind the other: The children stood in a line; a line of trees.) række

6) (a short letter: I'll drop him a line.) et par linier

7) (a series or group of persons which come one after the other especially in the same family: a line of kings.) linie; slægt; række

8) (a track or direction: He pointed out the line of the new road; a new line of research.) rute; retning

9) (the railway or a single track of the railway: Passengers must cross the line by the bridge only.) jernbanelinie; jernbanespor

10) (a continuous system (especially of pipes, electrical or telephone cables etc) connecting one place with another: a pipeline; a line of communication; All (telephone) lines are engaged.) pipeline; rør; -linie

11) (a row of written or printed words: The letter contained only three lines; a poem of sixteen lines.) linie

12) (a regular service of ships, aircraft etc: a shipping line.) rute

13) (a group or class (of goods for sale) or a field of activity, interest etc: This has been a very popular new line; Computers are not really my line.) linie; branche

14) (an arrangement of troops, especially when ready to fight: fighting in the front line.) linie; -linie
2. verb
1) (to form lines along: Crowds lined the pavement to see the Queen.) stå langs med

2) (to mark with lines.) markere med linier

•

- lineage
- linear
- lined

- liner

- lines
- linesman
- hard lines!
- in line for
- in
- out of line with
- line up
- read between the lines II verb
1) (to cover on the inside: She lined the box with newspaper.) fore; beklæde

2) (to put a lining in: She lined the dress with silk.) fore

•

- lined

- liner

- lining

* * *
I 1. noun
1) ((a piece of) thread, cord, rope etc: She hung the washing on the line; a fishing-rod and line.) snor; line

2) (a long, narrow mark, streak or stripe: She drew straight lines across the page; a dotted/wavy line.) streg; linie

3) (outline or shape especially relating to length or direction: The ship had very graceful lines; A dancer uses a mirror to improve his line.) linie

4) (a groove on the skin; a wrinkle.) rynke

5) (a row or group of objects or persons arranged side by side or one behind the other: The children stood in a line; a line of trees.) række

6) (a short letter: I'll drop him a line.) et par linier

7) (a series or group of persons which come one after the other especially in the same family: a line of kings.) linie; slægt; række

8) (a track or direction: He pointed out the line of the new road; a new line of research.) rute; retning

9) (the railway or a single track of the railway: Passengers must cross the line by the bridge only.) jernbanelinie; jernbanespor

10) (a continuous system (especially of pipes, electrical or telephone cables etc) connecting one place with another: a pipeline; a line of communication; All (telephone) lines are engaged.) pipeline; rør; -linie

11) (a row of written or printed words: The letter contained only three lines; a poem of sixteen lines.) linie

12) (a regular service of ships, aircraft etc: a shipping line.) rute

13) (a group or class (of goods for sale) or a field of activity, interest etc: This has been a very popular new line; Computers are not really my line.) linie; branche

14) (an arrangement of troops, especially when ready to fight: fighting in the front line.) linie; -linie
2. verb
1) (to form lines along: Crowds lined the pavement to see the Queen.) stå langs med

2) (to mark with lines.) markere med linier

•

- lineage
- linear
- lined

- liner

- lines
- linesman
- hard lines!
- in line for
- in
- out of line with
- line up
- read between the lines II verb
1) (to cover on the inside: She lined the box with newspaper.) fore; beklæde

2) (to put a lining in: She lined the dress with silk.) fore

•

- lined

- liner

- lining

English-Danish dictionary > line
32 enorme

adj.

enormous, huge.

* * *

enorme

► adjetivo

1 (grande) enormous, huge, vast

2 (desmedido) tremendous, great

3 familiar (muy bueno) very good, excellent

* * *

adj.

enormous

* * *

ADJ

1) (=muy grande) enormous, huge

2) * (=estupendo) killing *, marvellous

cuando imita al profe es enorme — when he takes off the teacher he's killing *

* * *

adjetivo <edificio/animal/suma> huge, enormous; < zona> vast, huge

sentí una pena enorme — I felt tremendously sad

* * *

= deep [deeper -comp., deepest -sup.], enormous, exponential, extensive, huge, infinite, mammoth, massive, monumental, prodigious, intense, abysmal, Herculean, colossal, of epic proportions, monstrous, a monster of a, Herculanian.

Ex. The world's largest processing department's plans and policies are always of deep interest.

Ex. In coventional libraries, such searches usually involve an enormous amount of time and energy.

Ex. Information technology continues to develop at an exponential rate.

Ex. The minutely detailed classification is of the type appropriate to an extensive collection.

Ex. A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.

Ex. It is still the same inexorably literal logic which must ultimately glance into the chaos, and small differences create infinite displacements between records.

Ex. The only problem is the mammoth task of interfiling new cards, especially in catalogues where there are large numbers of new or amended entries.

Ex. When the use of all synonymous terms would result in a massive duplication of A/Z subject index entries 'see references' are employed.

Ex. She was chairperson of the Task Force that in 1972 wrote a monumental report about discrimination against women in the library profession.

Ex. The summation of human experience is being expanded at a prodigious rate, and the means we use for threading through the consequent maze to the momentarily important item is the same as was used in the days of square-rigged ships.

Ex. Mexico is undergoing an intense epidemiological transition characterised by a decline in the incidence of infectious diseases and a rapid increase in the importance of chronic illnesses and accidents.

Ex. The major problem encountered in encouraging young adults to use public libraries is the abysmal lack of specialist young adult librarians = El principal problema que se encuentra para es incentivar a los jóvenes a usar las bibliotecas públicas es la enorme falta de bibliotecarios especialistas en temas relacionados con los adolescentes.

Ex. A task of Herculean proportions is how some members of Senate describe it.

Ex. University libraries have a problem in theft of books which is running at a colossal rate.

Ex. Even though they are not as long as I think they should be, many of the stories are of epic proportions and many of them are very entertaining.

Ex. Bogardus privately resolved that nothing would induce her to assent to this monstrous possibility.

Ex. Hurricane Rita became a monster of a storm as it gathered strength over the Gulf of Mexico.

Ex. The Ibbs family where founder members of this Herculanian pottery in Liverpool, England.

----

* boquete enorme = gaping hole.

* * *

adjetivo <edificio/animal/suma> huge, enormous; < zona> vast, huge

sentí una pena enorme — I felt tremendously sad

* * *

= deep [deeper -comp., deepest -sup.], enormous, exponential, extensive, huge, infinite, mammoth, massive, monumental, prodigious, intense, abysmal, Herculean, colossal, of epic proportions, monstrous, a monster of a, Herculanian.

Ex: The world's largest processing department's plans and policies are always of deep interest.

Ex: In coventional libraries, such searches usually involve an enormous amount of time and energy.

Ex: Information technology continues to develop at an exponential rate.

Ex: The minutely detailed classification is of the type appropriate to an extensive collection.

Ex: A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.

Ex: It is still the same inexorably literal logic which must ultimately glance into the chaos, and small differences create infinite displacements between records.

Ex: The only problem is the mammoth task of interfiling new cards, especially in catalogues where there are large numbers of new or amended entries.

Ex: When the use of all synonymous terms would result in a massive duplication of A/Z subject index entries 'see references' are employed.

Ex: She was chairperson of the Task Force that in 1972 wrote a monumental report about discrimination against women in the library profession.

Ex: The summation of human experience is being expanded at a prodigious rate, and the means we use for threading through the consequent maze to the momentarily important item is the same as was used in the days of square-rigged ships.

Ex: Mexico is undergoing an intense epidemiological transition characterised by a decline in the incidence of infectious diseases and a rapid increase in the importance of chronic illnesses and accidents.

Ex: The major problem encountered in encouraging young adults to use public libraries is the abysmal lack of specialist young adult librarians = El principal problema que se encuentra para es incentivar a los jóvenes a usar las bibliotecas públicas es la enorme falta de bibliotecarios especialistas en temas relacionados con los adolescentes.

Ex: A task of Herculean proportions is how some members of Senate describe it.

Ex: University libraries have a problem in theft of books which is running at a colossal rate.

Ex: Even though they are not as long as I think they should be, many of the stories are of epic proportions and many of them are very entertaining.

Ex: Bogardus privately resolved that nothing would induce her to assent to this monstrous possibility.

Ex: Hurricane Rita became a monster of a storm as it gathered strength over the Gulf of Mexico.

Ex: The Ibbs family where founder members of this Herculanian pottery in Liverpool, England.

* boquete enorme = gaping hole.

* * *

enorme

adjective

‹edificio/animal› huge, enormous; ‹aumento/suma› huge, enormous, vast; ‹zona› vast, huge

la diferencia es enorme the difference is enormous o huge

tiene unas manos enormes he has huge o enormous hands

sentí una pena enorme I felt tremendously sad o a tremendous sense of sadness

* * *

enorme adjetivo ‹edificio/animal/suma› huge, enormous;
‹ zona› vast, huge;
◊ sentí una pena enorme I felt tremendously sad

enorme adjetivo enormous, huge: vimos un elefante enorme, we saw an enormous elephant
(de consideración) un enorme error, a clanger

' enorme' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
atroz
- botija
- congratularse
- desnivel
- estrepitosa
- estrepitoso
- satisfacción
- soberana
- soberano
- sofoco
- supina
- supino
English:
effective
- enormous
- face
- gaping
- ginormous
- huge
- immense
- massive
- monstrous
- monumental
- vast
- whopper
- world
- derive
- extreme
- gigantic
- it
- prodigious
- scar
- yawning

* * *

enorme adj

1. [muy grande] [objeto, persona, cantidad] huge, enormous;
[defecto, error] huge;
estos animales tienen una enorme capacidad para reproducirse these creatures have an enormous reproductive capacity;

una torre de enorme altura an enormously tall tower;

tu hijo está ya enorme your son's really huge;

le invadía una enorme tristeza he was overcome by a great sadness

2. Fam [excelente] great, fantastic

* * *

enorme

adj enormous, huge

* * *

enorme adj

inmenso: enormous, huge

♦ enormemente adv

* * *

enorme adj enormous / huge

Spanish-English dictionary > enorme
33 explotar

v.

1 to exploit (person).

El tipo explota a los empleados The guy exploits the employees.

El minero explota los recursos The miner exploits the resources.

2 to explode.

El minero explotó la carga The miner exploded the charge.

La carga explotó The charge exploded.

María explotó por la ofensa Mary exploded because of the offense.

3 to use, to take unfair advantage of.

El timador usó a las personas The swindler used the people.

4 to explode on.

Nos explotó una bomba A bomb exploded on us.

* * *

explotar

► verbo transitivo

1 (sacar provecho) to exploit; (mina) to work; (tierra) to cultivate; (industria) to operate, run; (recursos) to tap, exploit

2 peyorativo (personas) to exploit

3 (bomba) to explode

► verbo intransitivo

1 (explosionar) to explode, blow up

* * *

verb

1) to exploit

2) to run, operate

* * *

1. VT

1) (=usar) [+ recursos, riquezas] to exploit; [+ planta] to run, operate; [+ mina] to work

2) (=usar excesivamente) [+ obreros] to exploit; [+ situación] to exploit, make capital out of

3) [+ bomba] to explode

2.

VI [bomba] to explode, go off

explotaron dos bombas — two bombs exploded o went off

cayó sin explotar — it fell but did not go off, it landed without going off

juegan con bombas sin explotar — they play with unexploded bombs

* * *
1.
verbo transitivo

1)

a) < tierra> to exploit, work; < mina> to operate, work; < negocio> to run, operate

b) <idea/debilidad> to exploit

2) < trabajador> to exploit
2.
explotar vi

a) bomba to explode, go off; caldera/máquina to explode, blow up

b) (fam) persona to explode, to blow a fuse (colloq)

* * *

= deploy, explode, exploit, harness, tap, burst, blow up, cash in on, prey on/upon, detonate, milk, mine, blow + a fuse, ride (on) + Posesivo + coattails, go off.

Ex. The article presents the results of trials in which the model was deployed to classify aspects of the construction industry, such as construction norms and regulations.

Ex. Other systems also employ a thesaurus in offering the facility to explode search profiles.

Ex. The Library of Congress List of Subject Headings (LCSH) can be exploited as a general index, since it shows LCC numbers for many of the headings listed.

Ex. When computers were first harnessed for information retrieval and cataloguing applications, the information retrieval systems, and some of the cataloguing systems developed in different environments.

Ex. It must be pointed out, however, that the potential for online catalogs to increase library staff productivity has hardly been tapped.

Ex. The article 'Will the CD bubble burst: conflicting messages on the future of electronic publishing' considers the future of the CD-ROM market.

Ex. The article 'The library has blown up!' relates the short circuit in the main electrical circuit board of Porstmouth Public Library caused by electricians who were carrying out routine work.

Ex. At the same time, veteran fiction writers and new authors cashing in on fame from other media continued to rule the lists.

Ex. From being a predator, England was becoming a major commercial power on whose ships others preyed.

Ex. There has been an explosion in terminology detonated by developments related to XML (eXtensible Markup Language).

Ex. A satisfactory balance between public and private involvement has not yet been reached and the companies involved are milking public funds.

Ex. For instance, if children are doing a project work on dogs, they will hunt out anything and everything that so much as mentions them and the bits thus mined are assiduously transcribed into project folders.

Ex. He simply blew a fuse and decided to go out on the road, spitefully apologizing again and again, until he got it right.

Ex. Riding the coattails of Barack Obama, Democrats picked up seven seats held by Republicans in Tuesday's election to match the seven it gained two years ago.

Ex. My hand looks like a hand grenade went off near it -- all cut up, bruised and with perforations by small bits of flying glass.

----

* explotar al máximo = realise + to its full potential, realise + the potential.

* explotar beneficios = exploit + benefits.

* hacer explotar = blow up.

* por explotar = untapped.

* sin explotar = untapped, unexploded.

* * *
1.
verbo transitivo

1)

a) < tierra> to exploit, work; < mina> to operate, work; < negocio> to run, operate

b) <idea/debilidad> to exploit

2) < trabajador> to exploit
2.
explotar vi

a) bomba to explode, go off; caldera/máquina to explode, blow up

b) (fam) persona to explode, to blow a fuse (colloq)

* * *

= deploy, explode, exploit, harness, tap, burst, blow up, cash in on, prey on/upon, detonate, milk, mine, blow + a fuse, ride (on) + Posesivo + coattails, go off.

Ex: The article presents the results of trials in which the model was deployed to classify aspects of the construction industry, such as construction norms and regulations.

Ex: Other systems also employ a thesaurus in offering the facility to explode search profiles.

Ex: The Library of Congress List of Subject Headings (LCSH) can be exploited as a general index, since it shows LCC numbers for many of the headings listed.

Ex: When computers were first harnessed for information retrieval and cataloguing applications, the information retrieval systems, and some of the cataloguing systems developed in different environments.

Ex: It must be pointed out, however, that the potential for online catalogs to increase library staff productivity has hardly been tapped.

Ex: The article 'Will the CD bubble burst: conflicting messages on the future of electronic publishing' considers the future of the CD-ROM market.

Ex: The article 'The library has blown up!' relates the short circuit in the main electrical circuit board of Porstmouth Public Library caused by electricians who were carrying out routine work.

Ex: At the same time, veteran fiction writers and new authors cashing in on fame from other media continued to rule the lists.

Ex: From being a predator, England was becoming a major commercial power on whose ships others preyed.

Ex: There has been an explosion in terminology detonated by developments related to XML (eXtensible Markup Language).

Ex: A satisfactory balance between public and private involvement has not yet been reached and the companies involved are milking public funds.

Ex: For instance, if children are doing a project work on dogs, they will hunt out anything and everything that so much as mentions them and the bits thus mined are assiduously transcribed into project folders.

Ex: He simply blew a fuse and decided to go out on the road, spitefully apologizing again and again, until he got it right.

Ex: Riding the coattails of Barack Obama, Democrats picked up seven seats held by Republicans in Tuesday's election to match the seven it gained two years ago.

Ex: My hand looks like a hand grenade went off near it -- all cut up, bruised and with perforations by small bits of flying glass.

* explotar al máximo = realise + to its full potential, realise + the potential.

* explotar beneficios = exploit + benefits.

* hacer explotar = blow up.

* por explotar = untapped.

* sin explotar = untapped, unexploded.

* * *

explotar [A1 ]

vt

A

1 ‹tierra› to exploit, work; ‹mina› to operate, work, exploit; ‹negocio› to run, operate

2 (sacar provecho de) to exploit

supo explotar esta idea al máximo she knew how to exploit this idea to the full o how to make the most of this idea

sabe explotar los puntos flacos de su rival he knows how to exploit his opponent's weak points

B ‹trabajador› to exploit

■ explotar

vi

1 «bomba» to explode, go off; «caldera/máquina» to explode, blow up

2 ( fam); «persona» to explode, to blow a fuse ( colloq), to go through the roof ( colloq)

* * *

explotar ( conjugate explotar) verbo transitivo
a) ‹ tierra› to exploit, work;

‹ mina› to operate, work;
‹ negocio› to run, operate
b) ‹idea/debilidad› to exploit

c) ‹ trabajador› to exploit

verbo intransitivo
a) [ bomba] to explode, go off;

[caldera/máquina] to explode, blow up
b) (fam) [ persona] to explode, to blow a fuse (colloq)

explotar
I verbo intransitivo (un artefacto) to explode, go off
II verbo transitivo
1 (desarrollar, utilizar) to exploit
(una mina) to work
(la tierra) to cultivate
2 (a una persona) to exploit
' explotar' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
estallar
- jugo
- exprimir
English:
blow up
- explode
- exploit
- go off
- milk
- prey on
- rag
- shell-hole
- tap
- untapped
- use
- flare
- mileage
- prey
- set
- top
- undeveloped
- work

* * *

explotar¹ vt

1. [niños, trabajadores] to exploit;

en esta empresa explotan a los trabajadores this firm exploits its workers

2. [recursos naturales] to exploit;
[fábrica, negocio] to run, to operate; [terreno] to farm; [mina] to work
3. [tema, asunto, situación] to exploit

explotar² vi

1. [bomba, explosivo, petardo] to explode, to go off;
[globo, neumático, caldera] to explode, to burst
2. [persona] to explode (with rage)

* * *

explotar

I v/t

1 tierra, mina work, exploit

2 situación take advantage of, exploit

3 trabajador exploit

II v/i go off, explode; fig

explode, blow a fuse fam

* * *

explotar vt

1) : to exploit

2) : to operate, to run

explotar vi

estallar, reventar: to explode

* * *

explotar vb

1. (bomba, etc) to explode / to go off

el artefacto explotó en un túnel the device exploded in a tunnel

2. (mina) to work

3. (tierra) to farm

4. (aprovechar) to exploit

explotaban a los niños they exploited the children

Spanish-English dictionary > explotar
34 línea

f.

1 line, tracing.

2 trajectory.

3 product line, line of production.

* * *

línea

► nombre femenino

1 (gen) line

2 (tipo) figure

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

de primera línea first-class, first-rate

en líneas generales in general

guardar la línea to keep one's figure

línea aérea airline

línea continua solid line, unbroken line

línea de meta finishing line

línea de puntos dotted line

línea de salida starting line

* * *

noun f.

line

* * *

1. SF

1) (=raya) line

dibujó una línea recta — he drew a straight line

primera línea de playa — sea-front

en línea — (=alineado) in (a) line, in a row

en línea recta — in a straight line

tirar una línea — (Arte) to draw a line

en toda la línea — [ganar, vencer] outright; [derrotar] totally

- ser de una o una sola línea

línea a trazos — broken line

línea de base — (Agrimensura) base-line

línea de cambio de fecha — International Date Line

línea de carga — load-line

línea de flotación — (Náut) water line

línea de la vida — life line

línea del biquini — bikini line

línea de montaje — assembly line, production line

línea de puntos — dotted line

línea discontinua — (Aut) broken line

línea divisoria — dividing line

2) [en un escrito] line

leer entre líneas — to read between the lines

- poner unas líneas a algn

3) (Com) (=género, gama) line

es único en su línea — it is unique in its line, it is the only one of its kind

en esa línea no tenemos nada — we have nothing in that line

de primera línea — first-rate, top-ranking

línea blanca — white goods pl

línea marrón — brown goods pl

4) (Elec) line, cable

línea aérea — overhead cable

línea de alta tensión — high-tension cable

línea de conducción eléctrica — power line

5) (Telec) line

me he quedado sin línea — I've been cut off

han cortado la línea — I've o we've been cut off

línea caliente — hot line

línea compartida — shared line

línea derivada — extension

línea de socorro — helpline, telephone helpline

línea directa — direct line

línea erótica — sex-line

línea exterior — outside line

línea gratuita — freephone

línea roja — hot line

línea telefónica — telephone line

línea (telefónica) de ayuda — helpline, telephone helpline

6) (Mil) line

cerrar líneas — to close ranks

de línea — regular, front-line

primera línea — front line

línea de alto el fuego — ceasefire line

línea de batalla — line of battle, battle line

línea de fuego — firing line

7) (Aer, Ferro)

autobús de línea — service bus, regular bus

línea aérea — airline

línea de abastecimiento — supply line

línea férrea — railway, railroad (EEUU)

línea regular — scheduled service

8) (Dep) line

línea de balón muerto — dead-ball line

línea de banda — sideline, touchline

línea de centro — halfway line

línea de fondo — by-line

línea de gol — goal line

línea delantera — forward line

línea de llegada — finishing line

línea de medio campo — halfway line

línea de meta — [en fútbol] goal line; [en carrera] finishing line

línea de puerta — goal line

línea de saque — baseline, service line

línea de toque — touchline

línea lateral — sideline, touchline

9) (Inform)

en línea — on-line

fuera de línea — off-line

línea de estado, línea de situación — status line

10) (=talle) figure

guardar o conservar la línea — to keep one's figure (trim)

11) (=moda)

la línea de 2009 — the 2009 look

12) [de pensamiento, acción] line

explicar algo a grandes líneas o en sus líneas generales — to set sth out in broad outline, give the broad outline of sth

línea de conducta — course of action

línea de partido — party line

línea dura — (Pol) hard line

13) [genealógica] line

en línea directa — in an unbroken line

línea de sangre — blood line

línea sucesoria — line of succession, order of succession

2.

SMF (Dep) linesman, assistant referee

* * *

femenino

1)

a) ( raya) line

la línea del horizonte — the horizon

cortar por la línea de puntos — cut along the dotted line

b) (Art) (dibujo, trazo) line

c) ( de cocaína) (fam) line (colloq)

- línea de demarcación/flotación

2) (Dep)

a) ( en fútbol) line

línea de gol or de fondo — goal line

b) ( en béisbol) drive

- línea de banda

- línea de contacto or golpeo

- línea de llegada

- línea de salida

3)

a) ( renglón) line

leer entre líneas — to read between the lines

b) líneas femenino plural ( carta breve)

escribirle unas líneas a alguien — to drop somebody a line

4) (fila, alineación) line

de primera línea — < tecnología> state-of-the-art; < producto> top-quality, high-class; <actor/jugador> first-rate

en primera línea: sigue en primera línea — she/he still ranks among the best

5)

a) (Transp)

no hay línea directa — there is no direct service

final de la línea — end of the line

no hay servicio en la línea 5 — ( de autobuses) there are no buses operating on the number 5 bus route; ( de metro) there is no service on line 5

b) (Elec, Telec) line

línea telefónica — telephone line

no hay línea or no me da línea — the phone o the line is dead

la línea está ocupada — the line is busy

c) ( en genealogía) line

por línea materna — on his (o her etc) mother's side

d) (Arg) ( de pescar) line

- línea aérea

- línea de montaje

- línea férrea

- línea regular

6) ( sobre un tema) line

seguir la línea del partido — to follow the party line

las principales líneas de su programa político — the main points of their political program

en la línea de... — along the lines of...

en líneas generales — broadly speaking

7)

a) (estilo, diseño)

un coche de líneas aerodinámicas — a streamlined car

ésta es la línea de moda — this is the in o fashionable look

una línea más clásica — a more classical look

b) (gama, colección) line

nuestra nueva línea de cosméticos — our new line o range of cosmetics

- línea blanca

8) ( figura)

mantener/cuidar la línea — to keep/watch one's figure

* * *

= line, line-up, trajectory.

Ex. Longer titles since each title can occupy only one line will be truncated and only brief source references are included.

Ex. The title of the article is 'The information market: a line-up of competitors'.

Ex. In hindsight, it is easy to see a trajectory of inevitability that made MARC, the ISBDs, and AACR2 seem more the result of historical forces than the often faltering and separate steps they were in truth.

----

* acceso en línea = online access.

* acceso mediante línea telefónica = dial-access.

* adquisición en línea = online acquisition.

* aprendizaje en línea = online learning.

* baile en línea = line dance.

* base de datos en línea = online database.

* búsqueda en línea = online searching, online search.

* cabeza de línea = railhead.

* catálogo en línea = online catalogue.

* comercio en línea = online business.

* compra en línea = online shopping.

* conexión a través de línea dedicada = leased line connection.

* continuando con la línea de = in the vein of.

* conversación en línea = online chat.

* cruzar la línea = cross + the line.

* cruzar la línea divisoria = cross + the boundary, cross + the great divide, cross + the dividing line, cross + the line.

* cruzar la línea que separa = cross over + the line separating.

* cruzar las líneas divisorias que separan + Nombre = cross + Adjetivo + lines.

* de línea blanda = soft-line.

* de línea dura = hard-line.

* de líneas rectas = straight-line.

* de primera línea = first-line.

* describir en líneas generales = outline.

* de última línea = streamlined.

* distribuidor de información en línea = host, online host.

* empleado de línea aérea = airline official.

* en el momento de escribir estas líneas = at the time of writing.

* en la línea de = along the lines.

* en la línea de fuego = in the hot seat, in the front line, on the front line.

* en la misma línea de = in the vein of.

* en la misma línea que = in line with.

* en línea = online [on-line], online-based, inline [in-line].

* en línea con = in line with.

* en línea recta = as the crow flies.

* en líneas generales = broadly speaking, generally, loosely, on the whole, in outline, in basic outline, roughly speaking, as a rough guide.

* en línea sucesoria = in line of descent.

* en + Posesivo + línea de tiro = in + Posesivo + sights.

* en primera línea = in the front line, first-line, on the front line.

* enseñanza en línea = online education.

* estado del ordenador en fuera de línea = offlineness.

* estado del ordenador en línea = onlineness.

* estar accesible en línea = go + online.

* facsímil de línea = line-block facsimile.

* foro de debate en línea = online forum.

* fuera de línea = offline [off-line].

* gráfica de líneas = line graph.

* grosor de línea = line-width.

* impresión en línea = online print.

* impresión fuera de línea = offline print.

* impresora de líneas = line printer.

* información en línea = online information.

* juez de línea = linesman, assistant referee.

* línea ADSL (Línea de Subscripción Digital Asimétrica) = ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line).

* línea aérea = airline.

* línea a línea = line-by-line.

* línea arbolada, la = timberline, the, tree line, the.

* línea argumental = line of discussion, line of direction.

* línea base = baseline [base line].

* línea con marcas entrecortadas = dashed line.

* línea curva = curved line.

* línea de acción = course of action.

* línea de actuación = course of action, line of attack, operational line, action line, prong, line of direction.

* línea de agua, la = water line, the.

* línea de alta tensión = power line.

* línea de argumentación = line of discussion.

* línea de búsqueda = query line.

* línea de comunicación = line of communication.

* línea de comunicaciones = communications line.

* línea de demarcación = demarcation line.

* línea dedicada = dedicated line, leased line.

* línea de dirección = line of direction.

* línea de dirección = line of direction.

* línea de falla = fault line.

* línea defensiva = line of defence, defence line.

* línea de ferrocarril = rail line, rail link, railway line, railroad(s), railway(s).

* línea de flotación, la = water line, the.

* línea de fuego = firing line, front-line, line of fire.

* línea de investigación = line of enquiry, line of research, line of enquiry, research front, avenue (for/of) research, research avenue, avenue of investigation, research line.

* línea de investigación futura = avenue (for/of) future research.

* línea de investigación posible = avenue for further research.

* línea del horizonte = skyline.

* línea de los árboles, la = timberline, the, tree line, the.

* línea de mando = line of authority, line of command.

* línea de medio campo = halfway line.

* línea de meta = finish line, finishing line.

* línea de montaje de coches = car assembly line.

* línea de números = number line.

* línea de pensamiento = line of thought.

* línea de productos = product line.

* línea de puntos = dotted line.

* línea de seguridad = lifeline.

* línea de trabajo = line of work.

* línea de transmisión = line transmission.

* línea de vegetación arbórea, la = tree line, the, timberline, the.

* línea de vegetación, la = tree line, the, timberline, the.

* línea de ventas = line.

* línea de vida = lifeline.

* línea directa = hotline [hot-line].

* línea divisoria = cut-off point, demarcation, divide, dividing line, borderline, cut off [cutoff].

* linea divisoria, la = great divide, the.

* línea fija = fixed line.

* línea horizontal = flat.

* línea indicativa de la evolución de una gráfica = trend line [trend-line].

* línea informativa = caption.

* línea internacional de cambio de fecha, la = International Date Line, the.

* línea numérica = number line.

* línea oblicua (/) = oblique stroke (/), oblique line (/), oblique.

* línea recta = straight line.

* líneas de sombras = hachures.

* líneas de transmisión por onda luminosa = light-wave transmission lines.

* línea separatoria = dividing line.

* línea telefónica = phone line, telephone line.

* línea telefónica dedicada = leased telephone line, leased phone line.

* listado de impresora de líneas = line printer output.

* mantenerse en línea con = keep in + line with.

* modalidad en línea = online mode.

* módulo de catálogo de acceso público en línea = online public access catalogue module.

* negocio en línea = online business.

* nueva línea = linefeed.

* OCLC (Centro Bibliotecario en Línea) = OCLC (Online Computer Library Center).

* patinador en línea = inline skater.

* patinaje en línea = inline skating, roller-blading.

* persona que se cuida la línea = weight watcher.

* por línea telefónica = over the telephone line.

* presentación en línea = online display.

* primera línea = front-line [front line], forefront.

* primera línea de defensa = first line of defence.

* recuperación en línea = online retrieval.

* recurso en línea = online resource.

* red en línea = online network.

* revista electrónica en línea = online journal.

* seguir líneas diferentes = be on different lines.

* Servicio de Consulta en Línea de BLAISE = BLAISE-LINE.

* servicio de información en línea = online information service.

* servicio en línea = online service.

* símbolo de avance de línea = line feed character.

* sistema en línea = online system.

* suscripción en línea = online subscription.

* teléfono de línea directa = direct-dial telephone.

* terminal en línea = online terminal.

* tiempo de conexión en línea = online time.

* tienda en línea = online store.

* título por línea = title-a-line.

* tres en línea = noughts and crosses, tic-tac-toe.

* usuario conectado en línea = online user.

* vehículo con ruedas en línea = cycle.

* vehículo de dos ruedas en línea = two-wheeler.

* * *

femenino

1)

a) ( raya) line

la línea del horizonte — the horizon

cortar por la línea de puntos — cut along the dotted line

b) (Art) (dibujo, trazo) line

c) ( de cocaína) (fam) line (colloq)

- línea de demarcación/flotación

2) (Dep)

a) ( en fútbol) line

línea de gol or de fondo — goal line

b) ( en béisbol) drive

- línea de banda

- línea de contacto or golpeo

- línea de llegada

- línea de salida

3)

a) ( renglón) line

leer entre líneas — to read between the lines

b) líneas femenino plural ( carta breve)

escribirle unas líneas a alguien — to drop somebody a line

4) (fila, alineación) line

de primera línea — < tecnología> state-of-the-art; < producto> top-quality, high-class; <actor/jugador> first-rate

en primera línea: sigue en primera línea — she/he still ranks among the best

5)

a) (Transp)

no hay línea directa — there is no direct service

final de la línea — end of the line

no hay servicio en la línea 5 — ( de autobuses) there are no buses operating on the number 5 bus route; ( de metro) there is no service on line 5

b) (Elec, Telec) line

línea telefónica — telephone line

no hay línea or no me da línea — the phone o the line is dead

la línea está ocupada — the line is busy

c) ( en genealogía) line

por línea materna — on his (o her etc) mother's side

d) (Arg) ( de pescar) line

- línea aérea

- línea de montaje

- línea férrea

- línea regular

6) ( sobre un tema) line

seguir la línea del partido — to follow the party line

las principales líneas de su programa político — the main points of their political program

en la línea de... — along the lines of...

en líneas generales — broadly speaking

7)

a) (estilo, diseño)

un coche de líneas aerodinámicas — a streamlined car

ésta es la línea de moda — this is the in o fashionable look

una línea más clásica — a more classical look

b) (gama, colección) line

nuestra nueva línea de cosméticos — our new line o range of cosmetics

- línea blanca

8) ( figura)

mantener/cuidar la línea — to keep/watch one's figure

* * *

= line, line-up, trajectory.

Ex: Longer titles since each title can occupy only one line will be truncated and only brief source references are included.

Ex: The title of the article is 'The information market: a line-up of competitors'.

Ex: In hindsight, it is easy to see a trajectory of inevitability that made MARC, the ISBDs, and AACR2 seem more the result of historical forces than the often faltering and separate steps they were in truth.

* acceso en línea = online access.

* acceso mediante línea telefónica = dial-access.

* adquisición en línea = online acquisition.

* aprendizaje en línea = online learning.

* baile en línea = line dance.

* base de datos en línea = online database.

* búsqueda en línea = online searching, online search.

* cabeza de línea = railhead.

* catálogo en línea = online catalogue.

* comercio en línea = online business.

* compra en línea = online shopping.

* conexión a través de línea dedicada = leased line connection.

* continuando con la línea de = in the vein of.

* conversación en línea = online chat.

* cruzar la línea = cross + the line.

* cruzar la línea divisoria = cross + the boundary, cross + the great divide, cross + the dividing line, cross + the line.

* cruzar la línea que separa = cross over + the line separating.

* cruzar las líneas divisorias que separan + Nombre = cross + Adjetivo + lines.

* de línea blanda = soft-line.

* de línea dura = hard-line.

* de líneas rectas = straight-line.

* de primera línea = first-line.

* describir en líneas generales = outline.

* de última línea = streamlined.

* distribuidor de información en línea = host, online host.

* empleado de línea aérea = airline official.

* en el momento de escribir estas líneas = at the time of writing.

* en la línea de = along the lines.

* en la línea de fuego = in the hot seat, in the front line, on the front line.

* en la misma línea de = in the vein of.

* en la misma línea que = in line with.

* en línea = online [on-line], online-based, inline [in-line].

* en línea con = in line with.

* en línea recta = as the crow flies.

* en líneas generales = broadly speaking, generally, loosely, on the whole, in outline, in basic outline, roughly speaking, as a rough guide.

* en línea sucesoria = in line of descent.

* en + Posesivo + línea de tiro = in + Posesivo + sights.

* en primera línea = in the front line, first-line, on the front line.

* enseñanza en línea = online education.

* estado del ordenador en fuera de línea = offlineness.

* estado del ordenador en línea = onlineness.

* estar accesible en línea = go + online.

* facsímil de línea = line-block facsimile.

* foro de debate en línea = online forum.

* fuera de línea = offline [off-line].

* gráfica de líneas = line graph.

* grosor de línea = line-width.

* impresión en línea = online print.

* impresión fuera de línea = offline print.

* impresora de líneas = line printer.

* información en línea = online information.

* juez de línea = linesman, assistant referee.

* línea ADSL (Línea de Subscripción Digital Asimétrica) = ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line).

* línea aérea = airline.

* línea a línea = line-by-line.

* línea arbolada, la = timberline, the, tree line, the.

* línea argumental = line of discussion, line of direction.

* línea base = baseline [base line].

* línea con marcas entrecortadas = dashed line.

* línea curva = curved line.

* línea de acción = course of action.

* línea de actuación = course of action, line of attack, operational line, action line, prong, line of direction.

* línea de agua, la = water line, the.

* línea de alta tensión = power line.

* línea de argumentación = line of discussion.

* línea de búsqueda = query line.

* línea de comunicación = line of communication.

* línea de comunicaciones = communications line.

* línea de demarcación = demarcation line.

* línea dedicada = dedicated line, leased line.

* línea de dirección = line of direction.

* línea de dirección = line of direction.

* línea de falla = fault line.

* línea defensiva = line of defence, defence line.

* línea de ferrocarril = rail line, rail link, railway line, railroad(s), railway(s).

* línea de flotación, la = water line, the.

* línea de fuego = firing line, front-line, line of fire.

* línea de investigación = line of enquiry, line of research, line of enquiry, research front, avenue (for/of) research, research avenue, avenue of investigation, research line.

* línea de investigación futura = avenue (for/of) future research.

* línea de investigación posible = avenue for further research.

* línea del horizonte = skyline.

* línea de los árboles, la = timberline, the, tree line, the.

* línea de mando = line of authority, line of command.

* línea de medio campo = halfway line.

* línea de meta = finish line, finishing line.

* línea de montaje de coches = car assembly line.

* línea de números = number line.

* línea de pensamiento = line of thought.

* línea de productos = product line.

* línea de puntos = dotted line.

* línea de seguridad = lifeline.

* línea de trabajo = line of work.

* línea de transmisión = line transmission.

* línea de vegetación arbórea, la = tree line, the, timberline, the.

* línea de vegetación, la = tree line, the, timberline, the.

* línea de ventas = line.

* línea de vida = lifeline.

* línea directa = hotline [hot-line].

* línea divisoria = cut-off point, demarcation, divide, dividing line, borderline, cut off [cutoff].

* linea divisoria, la = great divide, the.

* línea fija = fixed line.

* línea horizontal = flat.

* línea indicativa de la evolución de una gráfica = trend line [trend-line].

* línea informativa = caption.

* línea internacional de cambio de fecha, la = International Date Line, the.

* línea numérica = number line.

* línea oblicua (/) = oblique stroke (/), oblique line (/), oblique.

* línea recta = straight line.

* líneas de sombras = hachures.

* líneas de transmisión por onda luminosa = light-wave transmission lines.

* línea separatoria = dividing line.

* línea telefónica = phone line, telephone line.

* línea telefónica dedicada = leased telephone line, leased phone line.

* listado de impresora de líneas = line printer output.

* mantenerse en línea con = keep in + line with.

* modalidad en línea = online mode.

* módulo de catálogo de acceso público en línea = online public access catalogue module.

* negocio en línea = online business.

* nueva línea = linefeed.

* OCLC (Centro Bibliotecario en Línea) = OCLC (Online Computer Library Center).

* patinador en línea = inline skater.

* patinaje en línea = inline skating, roller-blading.

* persona que se cuida la línea = weight watcher.

* por línea telefónica = over the telephone line.

* presentación en línea = online display.

* primera línea = front-line [front line], forefront.

* primera línea de defensa = first line of defence.

* recuperación en línea = online retrieval.

* recurso en línea = online resource.

* red en línea = online network.

* revista electrónica en línea = online journal.

* seguir líneas diferentes = be on different lines.

* Servicio de Consulta en Línea de BLAISE = BLAISE-LINE.

* servicio de información en línea = online information service.

* servicio en línea = online service.

* símbolo de avance de línea = line feed character.

* sistema en línea = online system.

* suscripción en línea = online subscription.

* teléfono de línea directa = direct-dial telephone.

* terminal en línea = online terminal.

* tiempo de conexión en línea = online time.

* tienda en línea = online store.

* título por línea = title-a-line.

* tres en línea = noughts and crosses, tic-tac-toe.

* usuario conectado en línea = online user.

* vehículo con ruedas en línea = cycle.

* vehículo de dos ruedas en línea = two-wheeler.

* * *

línea

feminine

A

1 (raya) line

una línea curva/recta/quebrada a curved/straight/broken line

línea divisoria dividing line

la línea del horizonte the line of the horizon, the horizon

cortar por la línea de puntos cut along the dotted line

2 ( Art) (dibujo, trazo) line

3 (de cocaína) ( fam); line ( colloq)

Compuestos:

● línea continua

continuous o unbroken line

● línea de carga

Plimsoll line, load line

● línea de demarcación

demarcation line

● línea de flotación

water line

● línea de la vida

life line

● línea del corazón

heart line

● línea de policía

police line

● línea de tiempo

time line

● línea equinoccial

equinoctial circle o line

● línea internacional del cambio de fecha

international date line

● línea meridiana

meridian

B ( Dep)

1 (en fútbol) line

línea de gol or de fondo goal line

2 (en béisbol) drive

Compuestos:

● línea de banda

sideline, touchline

● línea de contacto

line of scrimmage

● línea de fondo

(en el tenis) baseline; (en el baloncesto) end line

● línea de golpeo

line of scrimmage

● línea de llegada

finishing line, wire ( AmE)

● línea de los veintidós metros

(en rugby) twenty-two meter line

● línea de meta

(en una carrera) finishing line, wire ( AmE); (en fútbol) goal line

● línea de salida

starting line

C

1 (renglón) line

te saltaste una línea you missed out o skipped a line

leer entre líneas to read between the lines

2 líneas fpl

(carta breve): les mandó unas líneas para decir que estaba bien she dropped them a few lines to say that she was well

D (fila, alineación) line

las líneas enemigas the enemy lines

de primera línea ‹tecnología› state-of-the-art;

‹producto› top-quality, high-class; ‹actor/jugador› first-rate

en primera línea: el alero demostró que sigue en primera línea the winger showed that he still ranks among the best o he is still a top-class player

Compuestos:

● línea de batalla

battle line, line of battle

● línea delantera

forward line

E

1 ( Transp):

no hay línea directa, tiene que hacer transbordo en Río there is no direct service, you have to change in Rio

final de la línea end of the line

no hay servicio en la línea 5 (de autobuses) the number 5 (bus) is not running, there are no buses operating o there is no service on the number 5 bus route; (de metro) there is no service on line 5

los barcos que cubren la línea Cádiz-Las Palmas the ships which cover the Cadiz-Las Palmas route o run

2 ( Elec, Telec) line

línea telefónica/telegráfica telephone/telegraph line

no hay líneaor no me da línea the phone o the line is dead

la línea está ocupada the line is busy o ( BrE) engaged

Compuestos:

● línea compartida

( Tel) party line

● línea fija

( Tel) land line

3 (en genealogía) line

por línea materna on his ( o her etc) mother's side

descendiente por línea directa direct descendant

4 ( Arg) (de pescar) line

Compuestos:

● línea aérea

airline

● línea de montaje

assembly line

● línea férrea

railroad track ( AmE), railway line ( BrE)

● línea regular

airline ( operating scheduled flights)

F

(sobre un tema): seguir la línea del partido to follow the party line

los partidarios de una línea más radical those in favor of taking a more radical line

las principales líneas de su programa político the main points of their political program

en la línea de … along the lines of …

el proyecto, en líneas generales, consiste en … broadly speaking o broadly, the project consists of …

en líneas generales las dos versiones coinciden broadly speaking, the two versions coincide, on the whole o by and large the two versions coincide

darse la línea ( Chi): se dio la línea y ganaron los liberales as expected, the liberals won

ser de una sola línea ( Chi); to be straight (as a die) ( colloq)

G

1

(estilo, diseño): un coche de líneas aerodinámicas a streamlined car, an aerodynamically designed car

ésta es la línea que llega para la próxima primavera this is the look for next spring

le gusta la ropa de línea clásica she likes the classical look

2 (gama, colección) line

nuestra nueva línea de productos de belleza our new line o range of beauty products

Compuesto:

línea blanca/marrón

white/brown goods (pl)

H

(figura): mantener/cuidar la línea to keep/watch one's figure

* * *

línea sustantivo femenino
1 ( en general) line;
◊ la línea de puntos the dotted line;

escribirle unas líneas a algn to drop sb a line;
seguir la línea del partido to follow the party line;
en líneas generales broadly speaking;
por línea materna on his (o her etc) mother's side;
línea de montaje assembly line;
línea de gol goal line;
línea de llegada finishing line, wire (AmE);
línea de salida starting line;
de primera línea ‹ tecnología› state-of-the-art;

‹ producto› top-quality, high-class;
‹actor/jugador› first-rate;
◊ leer entre líneas to read between the lines

2 (Transp, Tele) line;
◊ línea aérea airline;

final de la línea end of the line;
no hay línea directa a Córdoba there is no direct service to Cordoba;
intenté llamarte pero no había línea I tried to ring you but the phone o the line was dead;
la línea está ocupada the line is busy
3
a) (gama, colección) line, range;

◊ nuestra nueva línea de cosméticos our new line o range of cosmetics

b) ( estilo):

◊ una línea más clásica a more classic look

4 ( figura):
◊ cuidar la línea to watch one's figure

línea sustantivo femenino
1 Geom line
2 (trayecto de autobús) route
(de ferrocarril, metro) line
Av línea aérea, airline
3 Inform en línea, on-line
4 (figura, cuerpo esbelto) figure
mantener la línea, to keep one's figure
(diseño) design
5 Com (de productos) line
6 (fila) line
poner en línea, to line up
7 (cable) line
línea telegráfica, telegraph line
♦ Locuciones: en líneas generales, roughly speaking
entre líneas, between the lines
Tel línea caliente, hotline
' línea' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
aerodinámica
- aerodinámico
- alinear
- banda
- continua
- continuo
- derecha
- derecho
- estacionamiento
- extensión
- flotación
- fuego
- horizonte
- intervenir
- juez
- punto
- salida
- sucesión
- trazar
- trazo
- verso
- autobús
- comer
- conservar
- controlar
- curva
- delantero
- descendente
- discontinuo
- ecuador
- ininterrumpido
- lateral
- oblicuo
- ocupado
- paralela
- patín
- prolongar
- quebrado
- raya
- recto
- renglón
- saltar
- separar
- tenue
- transversal
- vertical
English:
airline
- borderline
- bus route
- busline
- commercial pilot
- credit line
- crow
- cut off
- dead
- describe
- draw
- editorial
- electrify
- extend
- faint
- file
- finishing line
- fire
- firing line
- frill
- hard line
- length
- line
- name
- oblique
- overbook
- party line
- plot
- product line
- range
- rank
- roller blades
- rollerblade
- route
- sideline
- skyline
- starting line
- straight
- touchline
- vein
- waistline
- waterline
- watershed
- winning post
- wiretapping
- air
- carrier
- demarcation
- directly
- dividing line

* * *

línea nf

1. [raya, trazo, renglón, límite] line;

una línea recta a straight line;

una línea quebrada a crooked line;

la línea del cielo the skyline;

ir en línea recta to go in a straight line;

leerle a alguien las líneas de la mano to read (the lines on) sb's hand;

estar en línea to be in (a) line;

poner/ponerse en línea to line up;

estacionar en línea to park end-to-end;

escribir o [m5] mandar unas líneas a alguien to drop sb a line;

Comp

leer entre líneas to read between the lines

Comp
línea continua [en carretera] solid white line; Com línea de crédito credit limit; Com línea de descubierto overdraft limit;
línea discontinua [en carretera] broken white line;

línea divisoria dividing line;

línea de flotación waterline;
Mil línea de fuego firing line;
línea de mira line of fire;

línea punteada dotted line;

línea de puntos dotted line;

línea de tiro line of fire

2. [ruta] line;

una nueva línea de autobús a new bus route;

han añadido varias paradas a la línea 30 the number 30 bus has several new stops;

la línea circular del metro the Br underground o US subway circle line

Comp
línea férrea railway (line), US railroad track;
línea de ferrocarril railway (line), US railroad track

3. [compañía aérea]
una línea de vuelos charter a charter airline

Comp
línea aérea airline
4. [de telecomunicaciones] line;

cortar la línea (telefónica) to cut off the phone;

dar línea a alguien to put in a line for sb;

no hay o [m5] no tenemos línea the line's dead

Comp
línea arrendada leased line; Fam línea caliente [erótica] chat line, telephone sex line; [de atención al cliente] hot line;
línea directa direct line;
Fig
tiene línea directa con el presidente she has a direct line to the president's office;

línea erótica telephone sex line;

línea exterior outside line;

línea privada private line;
Informát línea RDSI ISDN line; RP líneas rotativas [centralita] switchboard
5. [en deportes] line;

la línea defensiva/delantera the back/front line, the defence/attack;

la línea medular the midfield

Comp
línea de banda sideline, touchline;
línea de fondo [en fútbol] goal line [at end of field];
[en baloncesto] end line;
línea de gol goal line [between goalposts];

línea de llegada finishing line;

línea de marca [en rugby] try o goal line;

línea de medio campo halfway line;

línea de meta [en fútbol] goal line;
[en carreras] finishing line;
línea de salida starting line;

línea de saque baseline, service line;

línea de servicio service line;

línea de seis veinticinco [en baloncesto] three-point line;

línea de tiros libres [en baloncesto] free throw line

6. [en comercio] line;

una nueva línea de productos a new line of products

Comp
línea blanca white goods;
línea marrón brown goods

7. [silueta] [de persona] figure;

guardar/mantener la línea to watch/keep one's figure

8. [contorno]
un coche de línea aerodinámica a streamlined car

9. [estilo, tendencia] style;

la línea del partido the party line;

la línea dura del sindicato the union's hard line;

la línea de pensamiento keynesiana Keynesian thinking;

de línea clásica classical;

eso está muy en su línea that's just his style;

seguir la línea de alguien to follow sb's style

Comp
línea de conducta course of action;
línea de investigación line of inquiry

10. [categoría] class, category;

de primera línea [actor, pintor, producto] first-rate;
[marca, empresa] top
11. [de parentesco] line;

está emparentada con ella por línea materna she's related to her on her mother's side

12. Informát line;

en línea on-line;

fuera de línea off-line

Comp
línea de base baseline;
línea de comando command line

13. [en el bingo] line;

cantar línea to call a line;

¡línea! line!

14. Fam [de cocaína] line

15. Comp

en líneas generales in broad terms;

fueron derrotados en toda la línea they were soundly defeated

* * *

línea

f line;

mantener la línea watch one’s figure;

de primera línea fig first-rate;

tecnología de primera línea state-of-the art technology;

perdieron en toda la línea they were soundly beaten;

entre líneas fig between the lines;

escribir o

poner unas o

dos o

cuatro líneas a alguien drop s.o. a line;

la línea se ha cortado TELEC the line’s gone dead;

no hay línea TELEC the line’s dead

* * *

línea nf

1) : line

línea divisoria: dividing line

línea de banda: sideline

2) : line, course, position

línea de conducta: course of action

en líneas generales: in general terms, along general lines

3) : line, service

línea aérea: airline

línea telefónica: telephone line

* * *

línea n line

una línea recta a straight line

cuidar la línea / mantener la línea to watch your weight

línea aérea airline

línea férrea railway line

Spanish-English dictionary > línea
35 mampara

f.

screen.

* * *

mampara

► nombre femenino

1 screen

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

mampara de baño shower screen

* * *

SF screen, partition

* * *

femenino

a) (biombo, tabique) screen, partition

b) (Chi, Per) ( puerta) inner door

* * *

= divider, bulkhead, screen, partition.

Ex. Technological development, the visible indicator of modernization, is the great divider between the developed & the underdeveloped nations = El desarrollo tecnológico, indicador visible de la modernización, es el gran separador entre los países desarrollados y los subdesarrollados.

Ex. Furniture from ships was sometimes built-in, sometimes capable of being taken to pieces easily, and sometimes it bore fittings allowing it to be secured to deck or bulkhead.

Ex. An online terminal may comprise either a printer, or a visual display unit with a screen, or both a visual display unit and a printer.

Ex. It is concluded that the choice of citation and co-citation thresholds can be influenced by formal considerations which ensure statistically meaningful partitions rather than arbitrary decision which can produce meaningless interpretations.

* * *

femenino

a) (biombo, tabique) screen, partition

b) (Chi, Per) ( puerta) inner door

* * *

= divider, bulkhead, screen, partition.

Ex: Technological development, the visible indicator of modernization, is the great divider between the developed & the underdeveloped nations = El desarrollo tecnológico, indicador visible de la modernización, es el gran separador entre los países desarrollados y los subdesarrollados.

Ex: Furniture from ships was sometimes built-in, sometimes capable of being taken to pieces easily, and sometimes it bore fittings allowing it to be secured to deck or bulkhead.

Ex: An online terminal may comprise either a printer, or a visual display unit with a screen, or both a visual display unit and a printer.

Ex: It is concluded that the choice of citation and co-citation thresholds can be influenced by formal considerations which ensure statistically meaningful partitions rather than arbitrary decision which can produce meaningless interpretations.

* * *

mampara

feminine

1 (biombo, tabique) screen, partition

2 (Chi, Per) (puerta) inner door

* * *

mampara sustantivo femenino
a) (biombo, tabique) screen, partition

b) (Chi, Per) ( puerta) inner door

mampara sustantivo femenino screen
' mampara' also found in these entries:
English:
partition
- screen
- divider

* * *

mampara nf

screen

* * *

mampara

f screen

* * *

mampara nf

biombo: screen, room divider

* * *

mampara n screen

Spanish-English dictionary > mampara
36 mar

f. & m.

1 sea (also figurative).

veranean en el mar they spend their summer holidays at the seaside

hacerse a la mar to set sail, to put (out) to sea

pasan meses en el mar they spend months at sea (navegando)

alta mar high seas

a mares a lot

llover a mares to rain buckets

me cago en la mar (muy informal) bloody hell! (peninsular SpanishBr), goddamn it! (United States)

mecachis en la mar (informal Euf) sugar! (peninsular SpanishBr), shoot! (United States)

mar abierto the open sea

mar adentro out to sea

mar de fondo (también figurative) groundswell

mar gruesa rough o stormy sea

mar rizada choppy sea

el mar Báltico the Baltic Sea

el mar Cantábrico the Cantabrian Sea

el mar Caribe the Caribbean Sea

el mar Caspio the Caspian Sea

el mar Egeo the Aegean Sea

el mar Mediterráneo the Mediterranean Sea

el mar Muerto the Dead Sea

el mar del Norte the North Sea

el mar Negro the Black Sea

el mar Rojo the red Sea

Un mar de gente A great number of people.

2 EAR, enlarged access resources.

* * *

mar

► nombre masculino & nombre femenino

1 (gen) sea

2 (marejada) swell

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

en alta mar on the high sea, on the open sea

estar hecho,-a un mar de lágrimas to be crying his/her eyes out, be in floods of tears

hacerse a la mar to put (out) to sea, set sail

la mar de... familiar (mucha cantidad) a lot of, lots of, loads of

■ vino la mar de gente loads of people came 2 (muy) very, really

■ estás la mar de guapa you look really lovely

■ fue la mar de divertido it was great fun

llover a mares to rain cats and dogs, bucket down

¡pelillos a la mar! familiar let bygones be bygones!

por mar by sea

mar adentro out to sea

mar de fondo (corriente) ground swell 2 (agitación) undercurrent

mar gruesa heavy sea

mar picada rough sea

mar rizada slightly choppy sea

* * *

noun mf.

sea

* * *
I
SM
[a veces] SF
1) (Geog) sea

el fondo del mar — the bottom of the sea, the seabed

una casa al lado del mar — a house by the sea o on the coast

el avión cayó en el mar — the plane came down in the sea

el o la mar estaba en calma — the sea was calm

• iban navegando en mar abierto — they were sailing on the open sea

• mar adentro — [ir, llevar] out to sea; [estar] out at sea

• en alta mar — on the high seas

un buque de alta mar — an ocean-going vessel

pesca de alta mar — deep-sea fishing

• mar arbolada — heavy sea

• caer(se) al mar — [desde tierra] to fall into the sea; [desde un barco] to fall overboard

• echarse a la mar — to set sail

• mar de fondo — (lit) groundswell; (fig) underlying tension

• mar gruesa — heavy sea

• hacerse a la mar — liter [barco] to set sail, put to sea frm; [marinero] to set sail

• mar picada — choppy sea

• por mar — by sea, by boat

toda la mercancía llegará por mar — all the goods will arrive by sea o by boat

• mar rizada — rough sea

• los siete mares — the seven seas

- arar en el mar

- eso es hablar de la mar

- me cago en la mar salada

- mecachis en la mar

- quien no se arriesga no pasa la mar

mar Adriático — Adriatic Sea

mar Báltico — Baltic Sea

mar Cantábrico — Bay of Biscay, Cantabrian Sea

mar Caribe — Caribbean Sea

mar Caspio — Caspian Sea

mar de arena — poét sand dunes pl, desert wastes pl poét

mar de las Antillas — Caribbean Sea

mar del Norte — North Sea

mar Egeo — Aegean Sea

mar interior — inland sea

mar Jónico — Ionian Sea

mar Mediterráneo — Mediterranean Sea

mar Muerto — Dead Sea

mar Negro — Black Sea

mar Rojo — Red Sea

mar Tirreno — Tyrrhenian Sea
brazo 4), golpe 11)
2) (=marea) tide

hay demasiada mar para salir de pesca — the tide is too high to go fishing

mar llena — high tide

3) (=abundancia)

a)

• un mar de diferencia — a world of difference

hay un mar de diferencia entre las dos expresiones — there is a world of difference between the two expressions

existe un mar de diferencia entre nosotros — we're poles apart

• estar hecho un mar de dudas — to be full of doubt, be beset with doubts frm

• estar hecho un mar de lágrimas — to be in floods of tears

se fue hecha un mar de lágrimas — she left in floods of tears

b)

• a mares, estaba llorando a mares — she was crying her eyes out

estaba sudando a mares — he was sweating buckets *

estuvo lloviendo a mares todo el camino — it was raining cats and dogs o it was pouring (down) the whole way

el vino corría a mares en la fiesta — wine flowed like water at the party

c)

la mar de * —

tengo la mar de cosas que hacer — I've got no end of things to do

hace la mar de tiempo que no la veo — I haven't seen her for ages

es la mar de guapa — she's ever so pretty

estoy la mar de contento — I'm ever so happy, I'm over the moon *

lo hemos pasado la mar de bien — we had a whale of a time * o a great time

en Lisboa vivimos la mar de bien — we live ever so well in Lisbon, we love living in Lisbon

ese traje te queda la mar de bien — that suit looks wonderful on you
II
SF [eufemismo] de madre in obscene expressions
III
EXCL (Mil) march!

* * *

masculino (sometimes f in literary language and in set idiomatic expressions)

1) (Geog) sea

la vida en el mar — life at sea

a orillas del mar — by the sea

surcar los mares — (liter) to ply the seas (liter)

el fondo del mar — the seabed, the bottom of the sea

mar abierto — open sea

la corriente llevó la barca mar adentro — the boat was swept out to sea by the current

la tormenta los sorprendió mar adentro — they were caught out at sea by the storm

hacerse a la mar — (liter) to set sail

por mar — by sea

a mares — (fam)

llovió a mares — it poured with rain

sudaba a mares — he was streaming o pouring with sweat

arar en el mar — to beat (AmE) o (BrE) flog a dead horse

me cago (vulg) or (euf) me cachis en la (Esp) mar — shit! (vulg), shoot! (AmE euph), sugar! (BrE euph)

surcar los siete mares — to sail the seven seas

quien no se arriesga no pasa la mar — nothing ventured, nothing gained

- mar Cantábrico

- mar de fondo

- mar de las Antillas

- mar del Norte

- mar gruesa

- mar Mediterráneo

- mar patrimonial

- mar territorial or jurisdiccional

2) ( costa)

el mar — the coast

3)

a) (indicando abundancia, profusión)

un mar de...: estaba hecha un mar de lágrimas she was in floods of tears; está sumido en un mar de dudas he's plagued by o beset with doubts; tiene un mar de problemas — he has no end of problems

b) ( abismo)

hay un mar de diferencia entre... — there's a world of difference between...

los separaba un mar de silencio — (liter) a gulf of silence lay between them (liter)

c)

la mar de... — (fam)

está la mar de contento — he's over the moon (colloq)

es la mar de simpática — she's so nice

tengo la mar de cosas que contarte — I have loads of things to tell you (colloq)

* * *

= sea.

Ex. We are thus concerned with a virtually limitless number of concepts - building, book, reading, colour, sea, water, summer, England, 1066 AD - any concepts you like.

----

* agua del mar = sea-water [seawater].

* al borde del mar = at the seaside.

* alta mar = high seas, the.

* a mares = cats and dogs.

* arrastrar al mar = wash out to + sea.

* brazo de mar = sound.

* caballito de mar = seahorse.

* ciencias del mar = aquatic sciences.

* ciencias del mar, las = ocean sciences, the.

* cohombro de mar = sea cucumber.

* concha de mar = seashell.

* de alta mar = offshore, sea-going, ocean-going.

* de mar adentro = offshore.

* el que no se aventura no cruza el mar = nothing ventured, nothing gained.

* en alta mar = on the high seas.

* en el mar = at sea.

* energía del mar = ocean energy.

* en mar abierto = on the open sea.

* en un mar de dudas = at sea.

* erizo de mar = sea urchin.

* estar en un mar de dudas = feel at + sea, be all at sea.

* estar la mar de contento = be over the moon.

* estrella de mar = starfish.

* fondo del mar = sea bottom, seafloor [sea floor], ocean floor, seabed [sea bed].

* frente al mar = on the seafront, seafront, beachfront.

* hacerse a la mar = set + sail, cast off.

* hombre de mar = seaman [seamen -pl.].

* junto al mar = beachside, at the seaside.

* la mar de = a whole slew of.

* las profundidades del mar = the deep.

* lecho del mar = seabed [sea bed].

* llover a mares = rain + cats and dogs, tip + it down with rain, pelt + (it down) with rain, chuck + it down with rain, piss + it down with rain, lash + it down with rain, teem with + rain, hammer + it down with rain, the heavens + open, rain + pour down, pour down, pour down with + rain.

* lobo de mar = sea dog, salty dog, salty sea dog.

* manuscritos del Mar Muerto, los = Dead Sea Scrolls, the.

* mar abierto = open water, open sea, open ocean.

* mar adentro = offshore.

* mar Adriático, el = Adriatic sea, the.

* mar agitada = heavy sea.

* Mar Arábigo, el = Arabian Sea, the.

* mar arbolada = heavy sea.

* Mar Báltico, el = Baltic Sea, the.

* mar Caspio, el = Caspian Sea, the.

* mar de fondo = groundswell.

* Mar del Coral, el = Coral Sea, the.

* Mar del Norte, el = North Sea, the.

* Mar de Omán, el = Arabian Sea, the.

* mar de turbulencia = sea of stress.

* Mar Egeo, el = Aegean Sea, the.

* mar fuerte = heavy sea.

* mar gruesa = heavy sea.

* mar interior = inland sea.

* mar jurisdiccional = territorial sea.

* Mar Mediterráneo, el = Mediterranean Sea, the.

* Mar Muerto, el = Dead Sea, the.

* Mar Negro = Black Sea.

* mar picada = heavy sea.

* mar revuelto = stormy sea.

* Mar Rojo, el = Red Sea, the.

* mar tempestuoso = stormy sea.

* mar territorial = territorial sea.

* mar tropical = tropical sea.

* mina de mar = sea mine.

* nutria de mar = sea otter.

* oreja de mar = abalone.

* orilla del mar = seashore.

* pasárselo la mar de bien = have + a whale of a time, have + a great time.

* pepino de mar = sea cucumber.

* puerto de mar = seaport.

* rollos del Mar Muerto, los = Dead Sea Scrolls, the.

* siete mares, los = seven seas, the.

* sin salida al mar = land-bound [landbound], land-locked [landlocked].

* sudar a mares = sweat + buckets, sweat + bullets, sweat + profusely.

* surcar los mares = plough + the sea.

* surcar los siete mares = sail + the seven seas, roam + the seven seas.

* un mar de = a sea of.

* un mar de papel = a sea of + paper.

* verde mar = sea green.

* viejo lobo de mar = old sea dog, old salty dog.

* vista al mar = sea view.

* * *

masculino (sometimes f in literary language and in set idiomatic expressions)

1) (Geog) sea

la vida en el mar — life at sea

a orillas del mar — by the sea

surcar los mares — (liter) to ply the seas (liter)

el fondo del mar — the seabed, the bottom of the sea

mar abierto — open sea

la corriente llevó la barca mar adentro — the boat was swept out to sea by the current

la tormenta los sorprendió mar adentro — they were caught out at sea by the storm

hacerse a la mar — (liter) to set sail

por mar — by sea

a mares — (fam)

llovió a mares — it poured with rain

sudaba a mares — he was streaming o pouring with sweat

arar en el mar — to beat (AmE) o (BrE) flog a dead horse

me cago (vulg) or (euf) me cachis en la (Esp) mar — shit! (vulg), shoot! (AmE euph), sugar! (BrE euph)

surcar los siete mares — to sail the seven seas

quien no se arriesga no pasa la mar — nothing ventured, nothing gained

- mar Cantábrico

- mar de fondo

- mar de las Antillas

- mar del Norte

- mar gruesa

- mar Mediterráneo

- mar patrimonial

- mar territorial or jurisdiccional

2) ( costa)

el mar — the coast

3)

a) (indicando abundancia, profusión)

un mar de...: estaba hecha un mar de lágrimas she was in floods of tears; está sumido en un mar de dudas he's plagued by o beset with doubts; tiene un mar de problemas — he has no end of problems

b) ( abismo)

hay un mar de diferencia entre... — there's a world of difference between...

los separaba un mar de silencio — (liter) a gulf of silence lay between them (liter)

c)

la mar de... — (fam)

está la mar de contento — he's over the moon (colloq)

es la mar de simpática — she's so nice

tengo la mar de cosas que contarte — I have loads of things to tell you (colloq)

* * *

= sea.

Ex: We are thus concerned with a virtually limitless number of concepts - building, book, reading, colour, sea, water, summer, England, 1066 AD - any concepts you like.

* agua del mar = sea-water [seawater].

* al borde del mar = at the seaside.

* alta mar = high seas, the.

* a mares = cats and dogs.

* arrastrar al mar = wash out to + sea.

* brazo de mar = sound.

* caballito de mar = seahorse.

* ciencias del mar = aquatic sciences.

* ciencias del mar, las = ocean sciences, the.

* cohombro de mar = sea cucumber.

* concha de mar = seashell.

* de alta mar = offshore, sea-going, ocean-going.

* de mar adentro = offshore.

* el que no se aventura no cruza el mar = nothing ventured, nothing gained.

* en alta mar = on the high seas.

* en el mar = at sea.

* energía del mar = ocean energy.

* en mar abierto = on the open sea.

* en un mar de dudas = at sea.

* erizo de mar = sea urchin.

* estar en un mar de dudas = feel at + sea, be all at sea.

* estar la mar de contento = be over the moon.

* estrella de mar = starfish.

* fondo del mar = sea bottom, seafloor [sea floor], ocean floor, seabed [sea bed].

* frente al mar = on the seafront, seafront, beachfront.

* hacerse a la mar = set + sail, cast off.

* hombre de mar = seaman [seamen -pl.].

* junto al mar = beachside, at the seaside.

* la mar de = a whole slew of.

* las profundidades del mar = the deep.

* lecho del mar = seabed [sea bed].

* llover a mares = rain + cats and dogs, tip + it down with rain, pelt + (it down) with rain, chuck + it down with rain, piss + it down with rain, lash + it down with rain, teem with + rain, hammer + it down with rain, the heavens + open, rain + pour down, pour down, pour down with + rain.

* lobo de mar = sea dog, salty dog, salty sea dog.

* manuscritos del Mar Muerto, los = Dead Sea Scrolls, the.

* mar abierto = open water, open sea, open ocean.

* mar adentro = offshore.

* mar Adriático, el = Adriatic sea, the.

* mar agitada = heavy sea.

* Mar Arábigo, el = Arabian Sea, the.

* mar arbolada = heavy sea.

* Mar Báltico, el = Baltic Sea, the.

* mar Caspio, el = Caspian Sea, the.

* mar de fondo = groundswell.

* Mar del Coral, el = Coral Sea, the.

* Mar del Norte, el = North Sea, the.

* Mar de Omán, el = Arabian Sea, the.

* mar de turbulencia = sea of stress.

* Mar Egeo, el = Aegean Sea, the.

* mar fuerte = heavy sea.

* mar gruesa = heavy sea.

* mar interior = inland sea.

* mar jurisdiccional = territorial sea.

* Mar Mediterráneo, el = Mediterranean Sea, the.

* Mar Muerto, el = Dead Sea, the.

* Mar Negro = Black Sea.

* mar picada = heavy sea.

* mar revuelto = stormy sea.

* Mar Rojo, el = Red Sea, the.

* mar tempestuoso = stormy sea.

* mar territorial = territorial sea.

* mar tropical = tropical sea.

* mina de mar = sea mine.

* nutria de mar = sea otter.

* oreja de mar = abalone.

* orilla del mar = seashore.

* pasárselo la mar de bien = have + a whale of a time, have + a great time.

* pepino de mar = sea cucumber.

* puerto de mar = seaport.

* rollos del Mar Muerto, los = Dead Sea Scrolls, the.

* siete mares, los = seven seas, the.

* sin salida al mar = land-bound [landbound], land-locked [landlocked].

* sudar a mares = sweat + buckets, sweat + bullets, sweat + profusely.

* surcar los mares = plough + the sea.

* surcar los siete mares = sail + the seven seas, roam + the seven seas.

* un mar de = a sea of.

* un mar de papel = a sea of + paper.

* verde mar = sea green.

* viejo lobo de mar = old sea dog, old salty dog.

* vista al mar = sea view.

* * *

mar

masculine

(sometimes f in literary language and in set idiomatic expressions)

A ( Geog) sea

la vida en el mar life at sea

a orillas del mar by the sea

el mar estaba como un plato or una balsa the sea was like a millpond

el mar está picado or rizado the sea is choppy

el mar estaba agitado or revuelto the sea was rough

el galeón surcaba los mares ( liter); the galleon plied the seas ( liter)

el fondo del mar the seabed, the bottom of the sea

mar abierto open sea

la corriente llevó la barca mar adentro the boat was swept out to sea by the current

la tormenta los sorprendió mar adentro they were caught out at sea by the storm

hacerse a la mar ( liter); to set sail

por mar by sea

a mares ( fam): llovió a mares it poured with rain, it bucketed down ( BrE colloq), it rained cats and dogs

sudaba a mares he was sweating streams, he was streaming o pouring with sweat

arar en el mar to flog a dead horse

la mar en coche ( RPl fam): una cena con champán, el mejor caviar y la mar en coche a meal complete with champagne, the finest caviar, the works o the whole shebang o the whole caboodle ( colloq)

me cago ( vulg) or ( euf) me cachis en la mar shit! ( vulg), shoot! ( AmE euph), sugar! ( BrE euph)

surcar los siete mares to sail the seven seas

quien no se arriesga no pasa la mar nothing ventured, nothing gained

alto¹ (↑ alto (1))

Compuestos:

● mar Adriático

Adriatic Sea

● mar Amarillo

Yellow Sea

● mar Báltico

Baltic Sea

● mar Cantábrico

Bay of Biscay

● mar Caribe

Caribbean Sea

● mar Caspio

Caspian Sea

● mar de Barents

Barents Sea

● mar de (la) China

China Sea

● mar de fondo

(marejada) swell

parece que se llevan muy bien pero hay mucho mar de fondo on the surface they seem to get on really well but underneath it all there's a lot of tension o but there's a lot of underlying tension

● mar de las Antillas

Caribbean Sea

● mar del Norte

North Sea

● mar Egeo

Aegean Sea

● mar gruesa

rough o heavy sea

● mar interior

inland sea

● mar Jónico

Ionian Sea

● mar Mediterráneo

Mediterranean Sea

● mar Muerto

Dead Sea

● mar Negro

Black Sea

● mar patrimonial

territorial waters (pl) ( within a 200 mile limit)

● mar Rojo

Red Sea

● mar territorial or jurisdiccional

territorial waters (pl) ( within a 12 mile limit)

● mar Tirreno

Tyrrhenian Sea

B

(costa): el mar the coast

¿prefieres ir al mar o a la montaña? would you prefer to go to the coast o to the seaside or to the mountains?

C

1

(indicando abundancia, profusión): un mar de …: está sumido en un mar de dudas he's plagued by o beset with doubts

tiene un mar de problemas he has no end of problems

estaba hecha un mar de lágrimas she was in floods of tears

2

(abismo): hay un mar de diferencia entre los dos países there's a world of difference between the two countries

los separaba un mar de silencio ( liter); a gulf of silence lay between them ( liter)

3

la mar de … ( fam): está la mar de contento he's really happy, he's over the moon ( colloq)

es la mar de simpática she's so nice

lo pasamos la mar de bien we had a whale of a time ( colloq)

el vestido te queda la mar de bien the dress suits you perfectly, the dress looks really good on you

tengo la mar de cosas que contarte I have loads of things to tell you ( colloq)

* * *

Multiple Entries:
mar
mar.
mar sustantivo masculino (sometimes f in literary language and in set idiomatic expressions)
1 (Geog) sea;
◊ a orillas del mar by the sea;

el fondo del mar the seabed, the bottom of the sea;
mar abierto open sea;
la corriente llevó la barca mar adentro the boat was swept out to sea by the current;
hacerse a la mar (liter) to set sail;
por mar by sea;
mar Cantábrico Bay of Biscay;
mar de las Antillas Caribbean Sea;
mar Mediterráneo Mediterranean Sea;
mar gruesa rough o heavy sea
2 ( costa):
◊ prefiero el mar a la montaña I prefer the seaside to the mountains

mar
I sustantivo masculino & sustantivo femenino sea: ayer había mucha mar, there was a heavy sea yesterday
en alta mar, on the high seas
mar adentro, out to sea
II sustantivo masculino
1 sea
Mar Cantábrico, Cantabrian Sea
2 (gran cantidad) un mar de deudas, a flood of debts
♦ Locuciones: a mares, a lot: lloraba a mares, he was in floods of tears
hacerse a la mar, to set sail
la mar de, really, very: es una niña la mar de despierta, she's a really clever girl
' mar' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
adentro
- agitada
- agitado
- agitarse
- alborotada
- alborotado
- alborotarse
- arrastrar
- bonanza
- borde
- bramar
- bramido
- brava
- bravo
- buey
- cala
- chalet
- contramaestre
- crucero
- deslucir
- embravecerse
- encresparse
- erizo
- espuma
- estrella
- faenar
- golpe
- gruesa
- grueso
- langosta
- lengua
- loba
- lobo
- manga
- mareo
- nivel
- nublar
- nudo
- oleada
- orientarse
- orilla
- picada
- picado
- picarse
- puerto
- respeto
- revuelta
- revuelto
- ribera
- rizada
English:
above
- afloat
- bass
- bathe
- bed
- breaker
- calm
- can
- Caribbean
- choppy
- crossing
- Dead Sea
- facing
- groundswell
- hair
- heavy
- lap
- lost
- mar
- Mediterranean
- mighty
- navigate
- paddle
- prospect
- put out
- quagmire
- quit
- raging
- reclaim
- Red Sea
- rig
- rise
- roar
- rock
- rough
- sail
- sea
- sea dog
- sea-fish
- sea-level
- sea-water
- seabed
- seahorse
- seashore
- seasick
- seasickness
- shore
- sink
- smooth
- splendid

* * *

mar nm o nf Note that the feminine is used in literary language, by people such as fishermen with a close connection with the sea, and in some idiomatic expressions.

1. [océano, masa de agua] sea;

al nivel del mar at sea level;

se cayó al mar she fell into the sea;

hacerse a la mar to set sail, to put (out) to sea;

pasan meses en el mar [navegando] they spend months at sea;

mar adentro out to sea;

por mar [viajar, enviar] by sea;

un viaje por mar a sea voyage;
Literario
surcar los mares to ply the seas;

Comp

a mares: llover a mares to rain cats and dogs;

lloraba a mares she was crying her eyes out;

sudaba a mares he was sweating buckets;

Comp
RP Fam
la mar en coche the whole shebang;

Comp
Esp muy Fam
me cago en la mar Br bloody hell!, US goddamn it!;

Comp
Esp Fam Euf
mecachis en la mar Br sugar!, US shoot!

Comp
mar abierto open sea;
el mar Adriático the Adriatic Sea;

el mar Amarillo the Yellow Sea;

el mar Arábigo the Arabian Sea;

el mar de Aral the Aral Sea;

mar arbolada = rough sea with waves between 6 and 9 metres in height;

el mar Báltico the Baltic Sea;

mar calma calm sea;

el mar Cantábrico the Bay of Biscay;

el mar Caribe the Caribbean (Sea);

el mar Caspio the Caspian Sea;

el mar de China the China Sea;

el mar de(l) Coral the Coral Sea;

el mar Egeo the Aegean Sea;
también Fig mar de fondo groundswell;
el asunto ha creado mucha mar de fondo en la opinión pública the affair has given rise to a groundswell of public opinion;

mar gruesa = rough sea with waves under 6 metres;

un mar interior an inland sea;

el mar de Irlanda the Irish Sea;

el mar Jónico the Ionian Sea;

mar llana calm sea;

el mar Mediterráneo the Mediterranean Sea;

el mar Muerto the Dead Sea;

el mar Negro the Black Sea;

el mar del Norte the North Sea;

mar picada very choppy sea;

mar rizada choppy sea;

el mar Rojo the Red Sea;

el mar de los Sargazos the Sargasso Sea

2. [litoral] seaside;

nos vamos a vivir al mar we're going to live by the sea;

veranean en el mar they spend their summer Br holidays o US vacation at the seaside;

una casa en el mar a house by the sea;

junto al mar at the seaside

3. [gran abundancia]
un mar de gente a sea of people;

un mar de sangre a river of blood;

estoy inmersa en un mar de dudas I'm plagued with doubts;

Comp

estar hecho un mar de lágrimas to be crying one's eyes out

4. Fam
la mar de [muchos] loads of;
[muy] dead;
es la mar de inteligente she's dead intelligent;

todo va la mar de lento everything's going dead slowly;

está la mar de nerviosa she's dead nervous;

tengo la mar de cosas que hacer I've got loads of things to do

* * *

mar

m (also f) GEOG sea;

los mares del Sur the South Seas;

alta mar high seas pl ;

sudaba a mares fig fam the sweat was pouring off him fam ;

llover a mares fig fam pour, bucket down fam ;

la mar de bien ( muy bien) really well;

hacerse a la mar put to sea

* * *

mar nmf

1) : sea

un mar agitado: a rough sea

hacerse a la mar: to set sail

2)

alta mar : high seas

* * *

mar n sea

en el fondo del mar at the bottom of the sea

los barcos navegan por el mar ships sail on the sea

hacerse a la mar to put out to sea [pt. & pp. put] / to set sail [pt. & pp. set]

la mar de (muchos) a lot of / lots of (muy) very / really

la mar de gente lots of people

es la mar de simpático she's very nice

Spanish-English dictionary > mar
37 oscuridad

f.

darkness, blackness, dark, obscurity.

* * *

oscuridad

► nombre femenino

1→ link=obscuridad obscuridad

* * *

noun f.

1) darkness

2) obscurity

* * *

SF

1) (=ausencia de luz)

tiene pánico a la oscuridad — he's terrified of the dark

la oscuridad envolvía el pueblo — the village was wrapped in darkness

pasaba horas sentado en la oscuridad — he would sit for hours in the dark o in darkness

2) [de texto, explicación] obscurity

la oscuridad de su prosa — the obscurity of his prose

3) (=anonimato) obscurity

salir de la oscuridad — to emerge from obscurity

* * *

femenino

1) (de la noche, de lugar) darkness, dark

estaba sentada en la oscuridad — she was sitting in the dark o in darkness

le tiene miedo a la oscuridad — he's afraid of the dark

qué oscuridad! — it's so dark in here!

2) ( anonimato) obscurity; (de texto, definición) obscurity, obscureness

* * *

= darkness, obscurity, murkiness, blackness.

Ex. At every instant the darkness of the line being drawn is made equal to the darkness of the point on the picture being observed by the photocell.

Ex. Obscurity in the law is against the public interest.

Ex. Given the murkiness surrounding the identification of which spaces are public and which are private, it seems rather futile to attempt to define public space by a single characteristic = Dada la falta de claridad que rodea la identificación de qué espacios son públicos y cuáles son privados o semiprivados, parece bastante inútil intentar definir lo que es un espacio público con una sola característica.

Ex. Blackness is like putting you on a chessboard, where things are strictly black and white, and there is no in-between.

----

* al amparo de la oscuridad = under cover of darkness.

* caer en la oscuridad = fall into + obscurity, sink into + oblivion, sink into + obscurity, fade into + obscurity, fade into + oblivion.

* como barcos que se cruzan (en la oscuridad) = like passing ships (in the night).

* oscuridad absoluta = pitch darkness, pitch blackness.

* oscuridad total = pitch blackness, pitch darkness.

* * *

femenino

1) (de la noche, de lugar) darkness, dark

estaba sentada en la oscuridad — she was sitting in the dark o in darkness

le tiene miedo a la oscuridad — he's afraid of the dark

qué oscuridad! — it's so dark in here!

2) ( anonimato) obscurity; (de texto, definición) obscurity, obscureness

* * *

= darkness, obscurity, murkiness, blackness.

Ex: At every instant the darkness of the line being drawn is made equal to the darkness of the point on the picture being observed by the photocell.

Ex: Obscurity in the law is against the public interest.

Ex: Given the murkiness surrounding the identification of which spaces are public and which are private, it seems rather futile to attempt to define public space by a single characteristic = Dada la falta de claridad que rodea la identificación de qué espacios son públicos y cuáles son privados o semiprivados, parece bastante inútil intentar definir lo que es un espacio público con una sola característica.

Ex: Blackness is like putting you on a chessboard, where things are strictly black and white, and there is no in-between.

* al amparo de la oscuridad = under cover of darkness.

* caer en la oscuridad = fall into + obscurity, sink into + oblivion, sink into + obscurity, fade into + obscurity, fade into + oblivion.

* como barcos que se cruzan (en la oscuridad) = like passing ships (in the night).

* oscuridad absoluta = pitch darkness, pitch blackness.

* oscuridad total = pitch blackness, pitch darkness.

* * *

oscuridad

feminine

A

1 (falta de luz) dark

le tiene miedo a la oscuridad he's afraid of the dark

¡qué oscuridad! ¿por qué no enciendes la luz? it's so dark in here! why don't you switch on the light?

2 (sitio) darkness

la encontré llorando en la oscuridad I found her sitting in the dark o sitting in darkness crying

B

1 (anonimato) obscurity

esa película lo sacó de la oscuridad that film rescued him from obscurity

2 (de un texto, una definición) obscurity, obscureness

3 (circunstancias turbias) suspicious circumstances (pl)

* * *

oscuridad sustantivo femenino (de la noche, de lugar) darkness, dark;
◊ ¡qué oscuridad! it's so dark in here!

oscuridad sustantivo femenino
1 (falta de luz) darkness, dark
2 (falta de información) obscurity, obscureness

' oscuridad' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
miedo
- surgir
- julepe
English:
cloak
- dark
- darkness
- fear
- flare
- in
- obscurity
- plunge
- blunder
- cover
- gloom

* * *

oscuridad, obscuridad nf

1. [falta de luz] darkness;

me da miedo la oscuridad I'm afraid of the dark;

¿cómo puedes trabajar con esta oscuridad? how can you work in the dark like this?

2. [zona oscura]
en la oscuridad in darkness, in the dark;

se perdieron en la oscuridad they got lost in the dark

3. [falta de claridad] obscurity

4. [falta de fama] obscurity;

con ese disco salieron de la oscuridad that record brought them out of obscurity

* * *

oscuridad

f darkness

* * *

oscuridad nf

1) : darkness

2) : obscurity

* * *

oscuridad n (falta de luz) darkness

la oscuridad de la capilla the darkness of the chapel

Spanish-English dictionary > oscuridad
38 BERA

tote

* * *

I)

(ber; bar, bárum; borinn), v.

I.

1) to bear, carry, convey (bar B. biskup í börum suðr í Hvamm);

bera (farm) af skipi, to unload a ship;

bera (mat) af borði, to take (the meat) off the table;

bera e-t á hesti, to carry on horseback;

2) to wear (bera klæði, vápn, kórónu);

bera œgishjálm, to inspire fear and awe;

3) to bear, produce, yield (jörðin berr gras; tré bera aldin, epli);

4) to bear, give birth to, esp. of sheep and cows;

kýr hafði borit kálf, had calved;

absol., ván at hón mundi bera, that the cow would calve;

the pp. is used of men; hann hafði verit blindr borinn, born blind;

verða borinn í þenna heim, to be born into this world;

þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, born to;

borinn e-m, frá e-m (rare), born of;

Nótt var Nörvi borin, was the daughter of N.;

borinn Sigmundi, son of S.;

5) bera e-n afli, ofrafli, ofrliði, ofrmagni, ofríki, to bear one down, overcome, oppress, one by odds or superior force;

bera e-n ráðum, to overrule one;

bera e-n málum, to bear one down (wrongfully) in a lawsuit;

bera e-n sök, to charge one with a fault;

bera e-n bjóri, to make drunk with beer;

verða bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise;

borinn verkjum, overcome by pains;

þess er borin ván, there is no hope, all hope is gone;

borinn baugum, bribed; cf. bera fé á e-n, to bribe one;

6) to lear, be capable of bearing (of a ship, horse, vehicle);

þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, with as much as they could carry;

fig., to sustain, support (svá mikill mannfjöldi, at landit fekk eigi borit);

of persons, to bear up against, endure, support (grief, sorrow, etc.);

absol., bar hann drengiliga, he bore it manfully;

similarly, bera (harm) af sér, berast vel (illa, lítt) af;

bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore up bravely;

hversu berst Auðr af um bróðurdauðann, how does she bear it?

hon berst af lítt, she is much cast down;

bera sik vel upp, to bear well up against;

7) bera e-t á, e-n á hendr e-m, to charge or tax one with (eigi erum vér þess valdir, er þú berr á oss);

bera (kvið) á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty (í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn);

bera af e-m (kviðinn), to give a verdict for;

bera e-t af sér, to deny having done a thing;

bera or bera vitni, vætti, to bear witness, testify;

bera or bera um e-t, to give a verdict in a case;

bera e-n sannan at sök, to prove guilty by evidence;

bera e-n undan sök, to acquit;

bera í sundr frændsemi þeirra, to prove (by evidence) that they are not relations;

bera e-m vel (illa) söguna, to give a favourable (unfavourable) account of one;

refl. (pass.), berast, to be proved by evidence (þótt þér berist þat faðerni, er þú segir);

8) to set forth, report, tell;

bera e-m kveðju (orð, orðsending), to bring one a greeting, compliments (word, message);

bera or bera fram erindi sín fyrir e-n, to state (tell) one’s errand or to plead one’s case before one;

bera e-m njósn, to apprise one;

bera e-t upp, to produce, mention, tell;

bera upp gátu, to give (propound) a riddle;

bera upp erindi sín, to state one’s errand;

bera saman ráð sín, to consult together;

eyddist það ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed;

9) to keep, hold, bear, of a title (bera jarlnafn, konnungsnafn);

bera (eigi) giptu, gæfu, hammingju, auðnu til e-s, (not) to have the good fortune to do a thing (bar hann enga gæfu til at þjóna þér);

bera vit, skyn, kunnáttu á e-t, to have knowledge of, uniderstanding about;

vel viti borinn, endowed with a good understanding;

bera hug, áræði, þor, traust til e-s, to have courage, confidence to do a thing;

bera áhyggju fyrir e-u, to be concerned about;

bera ást, elsku, hatr til e-s, to bear affection, love, hatred to;

10) to bear off or away, carry off (some gain);

bera sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in;

hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orustum, he had been victorious in two battles;

bera hærra (lægra) hlut to get the best (the worst) of it;

bera efra (hærra) skjöld, to gain the victory;

bera hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), to be in high (low) spirits;

bera halann bratt, lágt, to cock up or let fall the tail, to be in high or low spirits;

11) with preps.:

bera af e-m, to surpass;

en þó bar Bolli af, surpassed all the rest;

bera af sér högg, lag to ward off, parry a blow or thrust;

bera eld at, to set fire to;

bera fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one;

bera vápn á e-n, to attack one with sharp weapons;

bera á or í, to smear, anoint (bera vatn í augu sér, bera tjöru í höfuð sér);

bera e-t til, to apply to, to try if it fits (bera til hvern lykil af öðrum at portinu);

bera e-t um, to wind round;

þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body;

bera um með e-n, to bear with, have patience with;

bera út barn, to expose a child;

12) refl., berast mikit (lítit) á, to bear oneself proudly (humbly);

láta af berast, to die;

láta fyrir berast e-s staðar, to stay, remain in a place (for shelter);

berast e-t fyrir, to design a thing (barst hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur);

at njósna um, hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about;

berast vápn á, to attack one another;

berast at or til, to happen;

þat barst at (happened) á einhverju sumri;

ef svá harðliga kann til at berast, if that misfortune does happen;

berast í móti, to happen, occur;

hefir þetta vel í móti borizt, it is a happy coincidence;

berast við, to be prevented;

ok nú lét almáttugr guð við berast kirkjubrunann, prevented, stopped the burning of the church;

II. impers., denoting a sort of passive or involuntary motion;

1) with acc., it bears or carries one to a place;

alla berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end);

bar hann (acc.) þá ofan gegnt Ösuri, he happened to come down just opposite to Ö.;

esp. of ships and sailors; berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eða annarra landa, we drift to Iceland or other countries;

þá (acc.) bar suðr í haf, they were carried out southwards;

Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, S. came suddenly upon them;

ef hann (acc.) skyldi bera þar at, if he should happen to come there;

e-n berr yfir, one is borne onwards, of a bird flying, a man riding;

hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, it passed quickly (of a flying meteor);

2) followed by preps.:

Gunnar sér, at rauðan kyrtil bar við glugginn, that a red kirtle passed before the window;

hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, there was nowhere a shadow;

e-t berr fram (hátt), is prominent;

Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingu ok bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, stood out conspicuously;

e-t berr á milli, comes between;

leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect;

fig. e-m berr e-t á milli, they are at variance about a thing;

mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, many things come now before my eyes;

veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m, game falls to one’s lot;

e-t berr undan, goes amiss, fails;

bera saman, to coincide;

bar nöfn þeirra saman, they had the same name;

fig., with dat.; bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the stories agreed well together;

fund várn bar saman, we met;

3) bera at, til, við, at hendi, til handa, to befall, happen, with dat. of the person;

svá bar at einn vetr, it happened one winter;

þó at þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, has befallen us;

bar honum svá til, it so befell him;

þat bar við (it so happened), at Högni kom;

raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by fact;

4) of time, to fall upon;

ef þing (acc.) berr á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls in the holy week;

bera í móti, to coincide, happen exactly at the same time;

5) denoting cause;

e-t berr til, causes a thing;

konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief;

ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason;

berr e-m nauðsyn til e-s, one is obliged to do a thing;

6) e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot;

hon á arf at taka, þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn;

e-t berr frá, is surpassing;

er sagt, at þat (acc.) bæri frá, hvé vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they spoke;

7) e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden;

e-t berr stóru, stórum (stœrrum), it amounts to much (more), it matters a great deal (more), it is of great (greater) importance;

8) absol. or with an adv., vel, illa, with infin.;

e-m berr (vel, illa) at gera e-t, it becomes, beseems one (well, ill) to do a thing (berr yðr vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli);

used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, or unbeseeming, improper, unfit (þat þykkir eigi illa bera, at).

II)

(að), v. to make bare (hon beraði likam sinn).

III)

f. she-bear, = birna.

* * *

1.

u, f.

I. [björn], a she-bear, Lat. ursa; the primitive root ‘ber’ remains only in this word (cp. berserkr and berfjall), björn (q. v.) being the masc. in use, Landn. 176, Fas. i. 367, Vkv. 9: in many Icel. local names, Beru-fjörðr, -vík, from Polar bears; fem. names, Bera, Hallbera, etc., Landn.

II. a shield, poët., the proverb, baugr er á beru sæmstr, to a shield fits best a baugr (q. v.), Lex. Poët., Edda (Gl.); hence names of poems Beru-drápa, Eg.

2.

bar, báru, borit, pres. berr,—poët. forms with the suffixed negative; 3rd pers. sing. pres. Indic. berrat, Hm. 10; 3rd pers. sing. pret. barat, Vellekla; 1st pers. sing. barkak, Eb. 62 (in a verse); barkat ek, Hs. 8; 2nd pers. sing. bartattu; 3rd pers. pl. bárut, etc., v. Lex. Poët. [Gr. φέρειν; Lat. ferre; Ulf. bairan; A. S. beran; Germ. gebären; Engl. bear; Swed. bära; Dan. bære].

A. Lat. ferre, portare:

I. prop. with a sense of motion, to bear, carry, by means of the body, of animals, of vehicles, etc., with acc., Egil tók mjöðdrekku eina mikla, ok bar undir hendi sér, Eg. 237; bar hann heim hrís, Rm. 9; konungr lét bera inn kistur tvær, báru tveir menn hverja, Eg. 310; bera farm af skipi, to unload a ship, Ld. 32; bera (farm) á skip, to load a ship, Nj. 182; tóku alla ösku ok báru á á ( amnem) út, 623, 36; ok bar þat ( carried it) í kerald, 43, K. Þ. K. 92; b. mat á borð, í stofu, to put the meat on table, in the oven; b. mat af borði, to take it off table, Eb. 36, 266, Nj. 75, Fms. ix. 219, etc.

2. Lat. gestare, ferre, denoting to wear clothes, to carry weapons; skikkja dýr er konungr hafði borit, Eg. 318; b. kórónu, to wear the crown, Fms. x. 16; atgeir, Nj. 119; vápn, 209: metaph., b. ægishjálm, to inspire fear and awe; b. merki, to carry the flag in a battle, Nj. 274, Orkn. 28, 30, 38, Fms. v. 64, vi. 413; bera fram merki, to advance, move in a battle, vi. 406.

3. b. e-t á hesti (áburðr), to carry on horseback; Auðunn bar mat á hesti, Grett. 107; ok bar hrís á hesti, 76 new Ed.; þeir báru á sjau hestum, 98 new Ed.

II. without a sense of motion:

1. to give birth to; [the root of barn, bairn; byrja, incipere; burðr, partus; and burr, filius: cp. Lat. parĕre; also Gr. φέρειν, Lat. ferre, of child-bearing.] In Icel. prose, old as well as mod., ‘ala’ and ‘fæða’ are used of women; but ‘bera,’ of cows and sheep; hence sauðburðr, casting of lambs, kýrburðr; a cow is snembær, siðbær, Jólabær, calves early, late, at Yule time, etc.; var ekki ván at hon ( the cow) mundi b. fyr en um várit, Bs. i. 193, 194; kýr hafði borit kálf, Bjarn. 32; bar hvárrtveggi sauðrinn sinn burð, Stj. 178: the participle borinn is used of men in a great many compds in a general sense, aptrborinn, árborinn, endrborinn, frjálsborinn, goðborinn, höldborinn, hersborinn, konungborinn, óðalborinn, samborinn, sundrborinn, velborinn, úborinn, þrælborinn, etc.; also out of compds, mun ek eigi upp gefa þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, … entitled to by inheritance, Ld. 102; hann hafði blindr verit borinn, born blind, Nj. 152, Hdl. 34, 42, Vsp. 2: esp. borinn e-m, born of one, Rm. 39, Hdl. 12, 23, 27, Hðm. 2, Gs. 9, Vþm. 25, Stor. 16, Vkv. 15; borinn frá e-m, Hdl. 24: the other tenses are in theol. Prose used of Christ, hans blezaða son er virðist at láta berast hingað í heim af sinni blezaðri móður, Fms. i. 281; otherwise only in poetry, eina dóttur (acc.) berr álfröðull (viz. the sun, regarded as the mother), Vþm. 47; hann Gjálp um bar, hann Greip um bar …, Hdl. 36: borit (sup.), Hkv. 1. 1.

β. of trees, flowers; b. ávöxt, blóm …, to bear fruit, flower … (freq.); bar aldinviðrinn tvennan blóma, Fms. ix. 265; cp. the phrase, bera sitt barr, v. barr.

2. denoting to load, with acc. of the person and dat. of the thing:

α. in prop. sense; hann hafði borit sik mjök vápnum, he had loaded himself with arms, i. e. wore heavy armour, Sturl. iii. 250.

β. but mostly in a metaph. sense; b. e-n ofrafli, ofrmagni, ofrliði, ofríki, magni, to bear one down, to overcome, oppress one, by odds or superior force, Grág. i. 101, ii. 195, Nj. 80, Hkr. ii. 371, Gþl. 474, Stj. 512, Fms. iii. 175 (in the last passage a dat. pers. badly); b. e-n ráðum, to overrule one, Nj. 198, Ld. 296; b. e-n málum, to bearhim down (wrongfully) in a lawsuit, Nj. 151; b. e-n bjóri, to make drunk, Vkv. 26: medic., borinn verkjum, sótt, Bjarn. 68, Og. 5; bölvi, Gg. 2: borne down, feeling heavy pains; þess er borin ván, no hope, all hope is gone, Ld. 250; borinn sök, charged with a cause, Fms. v. 324, H. E. i. 561; bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise, Fms. iv. 111; b. fé, gull á e-n, to bring one a fee, gold, i. e. to bribe one, Nj. 62; borinn baugum, bribed, Alvm. 5; always in a bad sense, cp. the law phrase, b. fé í dóm, to bribe a court, Grág., Nj. 240.

3. to bear, support, sustain, Lat. sustinere, lolerare, ferre:

α. properly, of a ship, horse, vehicle, to bear, be capable of bearing; þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, all that they could carry, Eb. 302;—a ship ‘berr’ ( carries) such and such a weight; but ‘tekr’ ( takes) denotes a measure of fluids.

β. metaph. to sustain, support; dreif þannig svá mikill mannfjöldi at landit fékk eigi borit, Hkr. i. 56; but metaph. to bear up against, endure, support grief, sorrow, etc., sýndist öllum at Guð hefði nær ætlað hvat hann mundi b. mega, Bs. i. 139; biðr hann friðar ok þykist ekki mega b. reiði hans, Fms. iii. 80: the phrase, b. harm sinn í hljóði, to suffer silently; b. svívirðing, x. 333: absol., þótti honum mikit víg Kjartans, en þó bar hann drengilega, he bore it manfully, Ld. 226; er þat úvizka, at b. eigi slíkt, not to bear or put up with, Glúm. 327; b. harm, to grieve, Fms. xi. 425: in the phrases, b. sik, b. af sér, berask, berask vel (illa, lítt), to bear oneself, to bear up against misfortune; Guðrúnu þótti mikit fráfall Þorkels, en þó bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore her bravely up, Ld. 326–328; lézt hafa spurt at ekkjan bæri vel af sér harmana, Eb. 88; berask af; hversu bersk Auðr af um bróðurdauðann? (how does she bear it?); hón bersk af lítt ( she is much borne down) ok þykir mikit, Gísl. 24; niun oss vandara gört en öðrum at vér berim oss vel (Lat. fortiter ferre), Nj. 197; engi maðr hefði þar jamvel borit sik, none bad borne himself so boldly, Sturl. iii. 132; b. sik vel upp, to bear well up against, bear a stout heart, Hrafn. 17; b. sik beiskliga ( sorely), Stj. 143; b. sik lítt, to be downcast, Fms. ii. 61; b. sik at göra e-t, to do one’s best, try a thing.

III. in law terms or modes of procedure:

1. bera járn, the ordeal of bearing hot iron in the hand, cp. járnburðr, skírsla. This custom was introduced into Scandinavia together with Christianity from Germany and England, and superseded the old heathen ordeals ‘hólmganga,’ and ‘ganga undir jarðarmen,’ v. this word. In Norway, during the civil wars, it was esp. used in proof of paternity of the various pretenders to the crown, Fms. vii. 164, 200, ix. Hák. S. ch. 14, 41–45, viii. (Sverr. S.) ch. 150, xi. (Jómsv. S.) ch. 11, Grett. ch. 41, cp. N. G. L. i. 145, 389. Trial by ordeal was abolished in Norway A. D. 1247. In Icel. It was very rarely mentioned, vide however Lv. ch. 23 (paternity), twice or thrice in the Sturl. i. 56, 65, 147, and Grág. i. 341, 361; it seems to have been very seldom used there, (the passage in Grett. S. l. c. refers to Norway.)

2. bera út (hence útburðr, q. v.), to expose children; on this heathen custom, vide Grimm R. A. In heathen Icel., as in other parts of heathen Scandinavia, it was a lawful act, but seldom exercised; the chief passages on record are, Gunnl. S. ch. 3 (ok þat var þá siðvandi nokkurr, er land var allt alheiðit, at þeir menn er félitlir vórn, en stóð ómegð mjök til handa létu út bera börn sín, ok þótti þó illa gört ávalt), Fs. Vd. ch. 37, Harð. S. ch. 8, Rd. ch. 7, Landn. v. ch. 6, Finnb. ch. 2, Þorst. Uxaf. ch. 4, Hervar. S. ch. 4, Fas. i. 547 (a romance); cp. Jómsv. S. ch. 1. On the introduction of Christianity into Icel. A. D. 1000, it was resolved that, in regard to eating of horse-flesh and exposure of children, the old laws should remain in force, Íb. ch. 9; as Grimm remarks, the exposure must take place immediately after birth, before the child had tasted food of any kind whatever, and before it was besprinkled with water (ausa vatni) or shown to the father, who had to fix its name; exposure, after any of these acts, was murder, cp. the story of Liafburga told by Grimm R. A.); v. Also a Latin essay at the end of the Gunnl. S. (Ed. 1775). The Christian Jus Eccl. put an end to this heathen barbarism by stating at its very beginning, ala skal barn hvert er borit verðr, i. e. all children, if not of monstrous shape, shall be brought up, N. G. L. i. 339, 363.

β. b. út (now more usual, hefja út, Am. 100), to carry out for burial; vera erfðr ok tit borinn, Odd. 20; var hann heygðr, ok út borinn at fornum sið, Fb. i. 123; b. á bál, to place (the body and treasures) upon the pile, the mode of burying in the old heathen time, Fas. i. 487 (in a verse); var hon borin á bálit ok slegit í eldi, Edda 38.

B. Various and metaph. cases.

I. denoting motion:

1. ‘bera’ is in the Grág. the standing law term for delivery of a verdict by a jury (búar), either ‘bera’ absol. or adding kvið ( verdict); bera á e-n, or b. kvið á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty; bera af e-m, or b. af e-m kviðinn, to give a verdict for; or generally, bera, or b. um e-t, to give a verdict in a case; bera, or b. vitni, vætti, also simply means to testify, to witness, Nj. 111, cp. kviðburðr ( delivering of verdict), vitnisburðr ( bearing witness), Grág. ii. 28; eigi eigu búar ( jurors) enn at b. um þat hvat lög eru á landi hér, the jurors have not to give verdict in (to decide) what is law in the country, cp. the Engl. maxim, that jurors have only to decide the question of evidence, not of law, Grág. (Kb.) ch. 85; eigi eru búar skildir at b. um hvatvetna; um engi mál eigu þeir at skilja, þau er erlendis ( abroad) hafa görzt, id.; the form in delivering the verdict—höfum vér ( the jurors), orðit á eitt sáttir, berum á kviðburðinn, berum hann sannan at sökinni, Nj. 238, Grág. i. 49, 22, 138, etc.; í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn, id.; b. annattveggja af eðr á; b. undan, to discharge, Nj. 135; b. kvið í hag ( for), Grág. i. 55; b. lýsingar vætti, Nj. 87; b. vitni ok vætti, 28, 43, 44; b. ljúgvitni, to bear false witness, Grág. i. 28; b. orð, to bear witness to a speech, 43; bera frændsemi sundr, to prove that they are not relations, N. G. L. i. 147: reflex., berask ór vætti, to prove that oneself is wrongly summoned to bear witness or to give a verdict, 44: berask in a pass. sense, to be proved by evidence, ef vanefni b. þess manns er á hönd var lýst, Grág. i. 257; nema jafnmæli berisk, 229; þótt þér berisk þat faðerni er þú segir, Fms. vii. 164; hann kvaðst ætla, at honum mundi berask, that he would be able to get evidence for, Fs. 46.

β. gener. and not as a law term; b. á, b. á hendr, to charge; b. e-n undan, to discharge, Fs. 95; eigi erum vér þessa valdir er þú berr á oss, Nj. 238, Ld. 206, Fms. iv. 380, xi. 251, Th. 78; b. e-m á brýnn, to throw in one’s face, to accuse, Greg. 51; b. af sér, to deny; eigi mun ek af mér b., at… ( non diffitebor), Nj. 271; b. e-m gott vitni, to give one a good…, 11; b. e-m vel (illa) söguna, to bear favourable (unfavourable) witness of one, 271.

2. to bear by word of mouth, report, tell, Lat. referre; either absol. or adding kveðju, orð, orðsending, eyrindi, boð, sögu, njósn, frétt…, or by adding a prep., b. fram, frá, upp, fyrir; b. kveðju, to bring a greeting, compliment, Eg. 127; b. erindi (sín) fyrir e-n, to plead one’s case before one, or to tell one’s errand, 472, 473; b. njósn, to apprise, Nj. 131; b. fram, to deliver (a speech), talaði jungherra Magnús hit fyrsta erindi (M. made his first speech in public), ok fanst mönnum mikit um hversu úbernsliga fram var borit, Fms. x. 53; (in mod. usage, b. fram denotes gramm. to pronounce, hence ‘framburðr,’ pronunciation); mun ek þat nú fram b., I shall now tell, produce it, Ld. 256, Eg. 37; b. frá, to attest, relate with emphasis; má þat frá b., Dropl. 21; b. upp, to produce, mention, tell, þótt slík lygi sé upp borin fyrir hann, though such a lie be told him, Eg. 59; þær (viz. charges) urðu engar upp bornar ( produced) við Rút, Nj. 11; berr Sigtryggr þegar upp erindi sín (cp. Germ. ojfenbaren), 271, Ld. 256; b. upp gátu, to give (propound) a riddle, Stj. 411, Fas. i. 464; b. fyrir, to plead as an excuse; b. saman ráð sín, or the like, to consult, Nj. 91; eyddist þat ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed, Post. 656 A. ii; b. til skripta, to confess (eccl.), of auricular confession, Hom. 124, 655 xx.

II. in a metaphorical or circumlocutory sense, and without any sense of motion, to keep, hold, bear, of a title; b. nafn, to bear a name, esp. as honour or distinction; tignar nafn, haulds nafn, jarls nafn, lends manns nafn, konungs nafn, bónda nafn, Fms. i. 17, vi. 278, xi. 44, Gþl. 106: in a more metaph. sense, denoting endowments, luck, disposition, or the like, b. (ekki) gæfu, hamingju, auðnu til e-s, to enjoy (enjoy not) good or bad luck, etc.; at Þórólfr mundi eigi allsendis gæfu til b. um vináttu við Harald, Eg. 75, 112, 473, Fms. iv. 164, i. 218; úhamingju, 219; b. vit, skyn, kunnáttu á (yfir) e-t, to bring wit, knowledge, etc., to bear upon a thing, xi. 438, Band. 7; hence vel (illa) viti borinn, well (ill) endowed with wit, Eg. 51; vel hyggjandi borinn, well endowed with reason, Grág. ii; b. hug, traust, áræði, þor, til e-s, to have courage, confidence … to do a thing, Gullþ. 47, Fms. ix. 220, Band. 7; b. áhyggju, önn fyrir, to care, be concerned about, Fms. x. 318; b. ást, elsku til e-s, to bear affection, love to one; b. hatr, to hate: b. svört augu, to have dark eyes, poët., Korm. (in a verse); b. snart hjarta, Hom. 5; vant er þat af sjá hvar hvergi berr hjarta sitt, where he keeps his heart, Orkn. 474; b. gott hjarta, to bear a proud heart, Lex. Poët., etc. etc.; b. skyndi at um e-t, to make speed with a thing, Lat. festinare, Fms. viii. 57.

2. with some sense of motion, to bear off or away, carry off, gain, in such phrases as, b. sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in …; hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orrustum, er frægstar hafa verit, he had borne off the victory in two battles, Fms. xi. 186; bera banaorð af e-m, to slay one in a fight, to be the victor; Þorr berr banaorð af Miðgarðsormi, Edda 42, Fms. x. 400: it seems properly to mean, to bear off the fame of having killed a man; verðat svá rík sköp, at Regin skyli mitt banorð bera, Fm. 39; b. hærra, lægra hlut, ‘to bear off the higher or the lower lot,’ i. e. to get the best or the worst of it, or the metaphor is taken from a sortilege, Fms. ii. 268, i. 59, vi. 412; b. efra, hærra skjöld, to carry the highest shield, to get the victory, x. 394, Lex. Poët.; b. hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), i. e. to be in high or low spirits, Nj. 91; but also, b. halann bratt (lágt), to cock up or let fall the tail (metaph. from cattle), to be in an exultant or low mood: sundry phrases, as, b. bein, to rest the bones, be buried; far þú til Íslands, þar mun þér auðið verða beinin at b., Grett. 91 A; en þó hygg ek at þú munir hér b. beinin í Norðrálfunni, Orkn. 142; b. fyrir borð, to throw overboard, metaph. to oppress; verðr Þórhalli nú fyrir borð borinn, Th. was defied, set at naught, Fær. 234; b. brjóst fyrir e-m, to be the breast-shield, protection of one, Fms. vii. 263: also, b. hönd fyrir höfuð sér, metaph. to put one’s hand before one’s head, i. e. to defend oneself; b. ægishjálm yfir e-m, to keep one in awe and submission, Fm. 16, vide A. I. 2.

III. connected with prepp., b. af, and (rarely) yfir (cp. afburðr, yfirburðr), to excel, surpass; eigi sá hvárttveggja féit er af öðrum berr, who gets the best of it, Nj. 15; en þó bar Bolli af, B. surpassed all the rest, Ld. 330; þat mannval bar eigi minnr af öðrum mönnum um fríðleik, afi ok fræknleik, en Ormrinn Langi af öðrum skipum, Fms. ii. 252; at hinn útlendi skal yfir b. ( outdo) þann sem Enskir kalla meistara, xi. 431: b. til, to apply, try if it fits; en er þeir báru til (viz. shoes to the hoof of a horse), þá var sem hæfði hestinum, ix. 55; bera til hvern lykil at öðrum at portinu, Thom. 141; b. e-t við, to try it on (hence viðburðr, experiment, effort): b. um, to wind round, as a cable round a pole or the like, Nj. 115; þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body, Fms. ix. 219; ‘b. e-t undir e-n’ is to consult one, ellipt., b. undir dóm e-s; ‘b. e-t fyrir’ is to feign, use as excuse: b. á, í, to smear, anoint; b. vatn í augu sér, Rb. 354; b. tjöru í höfuð sér, Nj. 181, Hom. 70, 73, cp. áburðr; b. gull, silfr, á, to ornament with gold or silver, Ld. 114, Finnb. 258: is now also used = to dung, b. á völl; b. vápn á e-n, to attack one with sharp weapons, Eg. 583, Fms. xi. 334: b. eld at, to set fire to, Nj. 122; b. fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one, Fms. x. 172, Hm. 150: metaph. reflex., bönd berask at e-m, a law term, the evidence bears against one; b. af sér, to parry off; Gyrðr berr af sér lagit, G. parries the thrust off, Fms. x. 421; cp. A. II. 3. β.

IV. reflex., berask mikit á (cp. áburðr), to bear oneself proudly, or b. lítið á, to bear oneself humbly; hann var hinn kátasti ok barst á mikit, Fms. ii. 68, viii. 219, Eb. 258; b. lítið á, Clem. 35; láta af berask, to die; Óttarr vill skipa til um fjárfar sitt áðr hann láti af b., Fms. ii. 12: berask fyrir, to abide in a place as an asylum, seek shelter; hér munu vit láta fyrir b., Fas. iii. 471; berask e-t fyrir, to design a thing, be busy about, barsk hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur, Greg. 53; at njósna um hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about, Fms. iv. 184, Vígl. 19.

β. recipr. in the phrase, berask banaspjót eptir, to seek for one another’s life, Glúm. 354: b. vápn á, of a mutual attack with sharp weapons, Fms. viii. 53.

γ. pass., sár berask á e-n, of one in the heat of battle beginning to get wounds and give way, Nj.:—berask við, to be prevented, not to do; ok nú lét Almáttugr Guð við berast kirkjubrunnann, stopped, prevented the burning of the church, Fms. v. 144; en mér þætti gott ef við bærist, svá at hón kæmi eigi til þín, vi. 210, vii. 219; ok var þá búit at hann mundi þegar láta hamarinn skjanna honum, en hann lét þat við berask, he bethought himself and did not, Edda 35; því at mönnum þótti sem þannig mundi helzt úhæfa við berask, that mischief would thus be best prevented, Sturl. ii. 6, iii. 80.

C. IMPERS.:—with a sort of passive sense, both in a loc. and temp. sense, and gener. denotes an involuntary, passive motion, happening suddenly or by chance:

I. with acc. it bears or carries one to a place, i. e. one happens to come; the proverb, alla (acc.) berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end), Lat. omnes una manet nox; bar hann þá ofan gegnt Özuri, he happened to come in his course just opposite to Ö., Lat. delatus est, Dropl. 25: esp. of ships or sailors; nú berr svá til ( happens) herra, at vér komum eigi fram ferðinni, berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eðr annara landa, it bore us to I., i. e. if we drive or drift thither, Fms. iv. 176; þá (acc. pl.) bar suðr í haf, they drifted southwards, Nj. 124.

β. as a cricketing term, in the phrase, berr (bar) út knöttinn, the ball rolls out, Gísl. 26, cp. p. 110 where it is transit.; berr Gísli ok út knöttinn, vide Vígl. ch. 11, Grett. ch. 17, Vd. ch. 37, Hallfr. S. ch. 2.

γ. Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, Sk. came suddenly upon them, Nj. 144; bar at Hróaldi þegar allan skjöldinn, the shield was dashed against H.’s body, 198; ok skyldu sæta honum, ef hann (acc.) bæri þar at, if he should per chance come, shew himself there, Orkn. 406; e-n berr yfir, it bears one, i. e. one is borne onwards, as a bird flying, a man riding; þóttist vita, at hann (acc.) mundi fljótara yfir bera ef hann riði en gengi, that he would get on more fleetly riding than walking, Hrafn. 7; hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, he passed quickly, of a flying meteor, Nj. 194; e-n berr undan, escapes.

2. also with acc. followed by prepp. við, saman, jafnframt, hjá, of bodies coinciding or covering one another: loc., er jafnframt ber jaðrana tungls ok sólar, if the orb of the moon and sun cover each other, Rb. 34; þat kann vera stundum, at tunglit (acc.) berr jafht á millum vár ok sólar (i. e. in a moon eclipse), 108; ber nokkut jaðar (acc.) þess hjá sólar jaðri, 34; Gunnarr sér at rauðan kyrtil (acc.) bar við glugginn, G. sees that a red kirtle passed before the window, Nj. 114; bar fyrir utan þat skip vápnaburð (acc.) heiðingja (gen. pl.), the missiles of the heathens passed over the ship without hurting them, flew too high, Fms. vii. 232; hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, nowhere a shadow, all bright, Nj. 118; þangat sem helzt mátti nokkut yfir þá skugga bera af skóginum, where they were shadowed (hidden) by the trees, Fms. x. 239; e-t berr fram (hátt), a body is prominent, Lat. eminet; Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingunni, bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, king O. stood out conspicuously, ii. 308; b. yfir, þótti mjök bera hljóð (acc.) þar yfir er Ólafr sat, the sound was heard over there where O. sat, Sturl. i. 21; b. á milli, something comes between; leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect, Nj. 263: metaph., e-m berr e-t á milli, they come to dissent, 13, v. 1.; b. fyrir augu (hence fyrirburðr, vision), of a vision or the like; mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, ek sé …, many things come now before my eyes, 104; hann mundi allt þat er fyrir hann hafði borit, i. e. all the dream, 195; eina nótt berr fyrir hann í svefni mikla sýn, Fms. i. 137, Rd. 290; veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m (a metaphor from hunting), sport falls to one’s lot; hér bæri veiði í hendr nú, here would be a game, Nj. 252; e-t berr undan (a metaphor from fishing, hunting term), when one misses one’s opportunity; vel væri þá … at þá veiði (acc.) bæri eigi undan, that this game should not go amiss, 69; en ef þetta (acc.) berr undan, if this breaks down, 63; hon bað hann þá drepa einhvern manna hans, heldr en allt (acc.) bæri undan, rather than that all should go amiss, Eg. 258: absol., þyki mér illa, ef undan berr, if I miss it, Nj. 155; viljum vér ekki at undan beri at…, we will by no means miss it…, Fms. viii. 309, v. 1. The passage Bs. i. 416 (en fjárhlutr sá er átt hafði Ari, bar undan Guðmundi) is hardly correct, fjárhlut þann would run better, cp. bera undir, as a law term, below.

II. adding prepp.; b. við, at, til, at hendi, at móti, til handa …, to befall, happen, Lat. accidere, occurrere, with dat. of the person, (v. atburðr, viðburðr, tilburðr); engi hlut skyldi þann at b., no such thing should happen as…, Fms. xi. 76; svá bar at einn vetr, it befell, x. 201; þat hefir nú víst at hendi borit, er…, Nj. 174; þó þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, Eg. 7; b. til handa, id., Sks. 327; bar honum svá til, so it befell him, Fms. xi. 425; at honum bæri engan váðaligan hlut til á veginum, that nothing dangerous should befall him on the way, Stj. 212; bæri þat þá svá við, at hann ryfi, it then perchance might happen, that …, 102; þat bar við at Högni kom, 169, 172, 82; raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by the fact, event, Fms. ix. 474, x. 185.

2. temp., e-t berr á, it happens to fall on …; ef þing (acc.) ber á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls on the holy week (Whitsun), Grág. i. 106; ef Crucis messu (acc.) berr á Drottins dag, Rb. 44; berr hana (viz. Petrs messu, June 29) aldrei svá optarr á öldinni, 78; þat er nú berr oss næst, what has occurred of late, Sturl. iii. 182: b. í móti, to happen exactly at a time; þetta (acc.) bar í móti at þenna sama dag andaðist Brandr biskup, Bs. i. 468; b. saman, id.; bar þat saman, at pá var Gunnarr at segja brennusöguna, just when G. was about telling the story, Nj. 269.

3. metaph. of agreement or separation; en þat (acc.) þykir mjök saman b. ok þessi frásögn, Fms. x. 276: with dat., bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the records agreed well together, Nj. 100, v. l.; berr nú enn í sundr með þeim, Bjarna ok Þorkatli at sinni, B. and Th. missed each other, Vápn. 25.

4. denoting cause; e-t (acc.) berr til …, causes a thing; ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason, Nj. 75; at þat beri til skilnaðar okkars, that this will make us to part (divorce), 261; konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief? Fms. vi. 355; þat berr til tunglhlaups, Rb. 32.

β. meiri ván at brátt beri þat (acc.) til bóta, at herviliga steypi hans ríki, i. e. there will soon come help (revenge), Fms. x. 264; fjórir eru þeir hlutir er menn (acc.) berr í ætt á landi hér, there are four cases under which people may be adopted, Grág. i. 361.

γ. e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot; hon á arf at taka þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn, 179; mikla erfð (acc.) bar undir hana, Mar. (Fr.); berr yfir, of surpassing, Bs. ii. 121, 158; b. frá, id. (fráburðr); herðimikill svá at þat (acc.) bar frá því sem aðrir menn, Eg. 305; er sagt, at þat bæri frá hve vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they did speak, Jb. 11; bar þat mest frá hversu illa hann var limaðr, but above all, how…, Ó. H. 74.

5. with adverbial nouns in a dat. form; e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden; berr þetta (acc.) nú allbráðum, Fms. xi. 139; cp. vera bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise (above); berr stórum, stærrum, it matters a great deal; ætla ek stærrum b. hin lagabrotin (acc.), they are much more important, matter more, vii. 305; var þat góðr kostr, svá at stórum bar, xi. 50; hefir oss orðit svá mikil vanhyggja, at stóru berr, an enormous blunder, Gísl. 51; svá langa leið, at stóru bar, Fas. i. 116; þat berr stórum, hversu mér þóknast vel þeirra athæfi, it amounts to a great deal, my liking their service, i. e. I do greatly like, Fms. ii. 37; eigi berr þat allsmám hversu vel mér líkar, in no small degree do I like, x. 296.

β. with dat., it is fitting, becoming; svá mikit sem landeiganda (dat.) berr til at hafa eptir lögum, what he is legally entitled to, Dipl. iii. 10; berr til handa, it falls to one’s lot, v. above, Grág. i. 93.

III. answering to Lat. oportet, absolutely or with an adverb, vel, illa, with infinit.; e-m berr, it beseems, becomes one; berr þat ekki né stendr þvílíkum höfuðfeðr, at falsa, Stj. 132; berr yðr (dat.) vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli, Fms. ix. 326; sagði, at þat bar eigi Kristnum mönnum, at særa Guð, x. 22; þá siðu at mér beri vel, Sks. 353 B: used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, unbeseeming, unfit, improper; athæfi þat er vel beri fyrir konungs augliti, 282; þat þykir ok eigi illa bera, at maðr hafi svart skinn til hosna, i. e. it suits pretty well, 301: in case of a pers. pron. in acc. or dat. being added, the sentence becomes personal in order to avoid doubling the impers. sentence, e. g. e-m berr skylda (not skyldu) til, one is bound by duty; veit ek eigi hver skylda (nom.) yðr (acc.) ber til þess at láta jarl einn ráða, Fms. i. 52: also leaving the dat. out, skylda berr til at vera forsjámaðr með honum, vii. 280; eigi berr hér til úviska mín, it is not that I am not knowing, Nj. 135.

IV. when the reflex. inflexion is added to the verb, the noun loses its impers. character and is turned from acc. into nom., e. g. þar (þat?) mun hugrinn minn mest hafa fyrir borizt, this is what I suspected, fancied, Lv. 34; cp. hugarburðr, fancy, and e-t berr fyrir e-n (above, C. I. 2); hefir þetta (nom.) vel í móti borizt, a happy coincidence, Nj. 104; ef svá harðliga kann til at berask, if the misfortunes do happen, Gþl. 55; barsk sú úhamingja (nom.) til á Íslandi, that mischief happened (no doubt the passage is thus to be emended), Bs. i. 78, but bar þá úhamingju …; þat (nom.) barsk at, happened, Fms. x. 253; fundir várir (nom.) hafa at borizt nokkurum sinnum, vii. 256; þat barsk at á einhverju sumri, Eg. 154; bærist at um síðir at allr þingheimrinn berðist, 765, cp. berast við, berask fyrir above (B. V.): berast, absol., means to be shaken, knocked about; var þess ván, at fylkingar mundu berast í hergöngunni, that they would be brought into some confusion, Fms. v. 74; Hrólfr gékk at ramliga, ok barst Atli (was shaken, gave away) fyrir orku sakir, þar til er hann féll. Fas. iii. 253; barst Jökull allr fyrir orku sakir (of two wrestling), Ísl. ii. 467, Fms. iii. 189: vide B. IV.

D. In mod. usage the strong bera—bar is also used in impersonal phrases, denoting to let a thing be seen, shew, but almost always with a negative preceding, e. g. ekki bar (ber) á því, it could ( can) not be seen; að á engu bæri, láta ekki á bera ( to keep tight), etc. All these phrases are no doubt alterations from the weak verb bera, að, nudare, and never occur in old writers; we have not met with any instance previous to the Reformation; the use is certainly of late date, and affords a rare instance of weak verbs turning into strong; the reverse is more freq. the case.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > BERA
39 strengja

(-da, -dr), v. to fasten with a string, bind tight (hosan strengd at beini); hann strengdi alt í milli skipanna ok bryggnanna, he stretched cables between the ships and the bridges; s. or s. aptr dyrr, to fasten the door; s. e-n inni or úti, to shut one in or out; s. heit or s. e-s heit, to make a solemn vow.

* * *

ð, [strengr], to string, fasten with a string, to bind tight; hosan strengd at beini, Eg. 602; sterkliga saman strengt, Stj. 12; strengdr niðr í kistuna, Pr. 412; s. aptr dyr, kirkju, hlið, port, to fasten the door, Grett. 159, Bs. ii. 76, Mar.; s. e-n inni or úti, to shut one in or out, Karl. 152, Stj. 40; þeir létu búa um akkeri, ok strengja um viðu, Fms. viii. 113; hann strengdi allt í milli skipanna ok bryggnanna, stretched cables between the ships and the bridges, 121; steinninn á sleða settr ok ramliga strengdr, Mar.

2. the phrase, strengja heit, or s. e-s heit, to ‘fasten a vow,’ make a solemn vow, Fs. 122, Hrafn. 5, Fms. i. 3, xi. 26, 109–112, Fb. ii. 353, Ísl. ii. 166; see heit, heit-strenging.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > strengja
40 БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

Мы приняли следующие сокращения для наиболее часто упоминаемых книг и журналов:

IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysis

JAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association

SE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)

PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)

PQ - Psychoanalytic Quarterly

WAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)

PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)

\

О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts

\

1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.

2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.

3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.

5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.

6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.

7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.

8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.

9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.

10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.

11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.

12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.

14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.

15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.

16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.

17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.

18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.

19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.

20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.

21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.

22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.

23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.

24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.

25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.

27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.

28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.

29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.

31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.

32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.

33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.

34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.

36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.

37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.

38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.

39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.

40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.

41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).

42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.

43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.

44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.

45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.

46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.

47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.

48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.

49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.

50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.

51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.

52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.

53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.

54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.

55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.

56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.

57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.

58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.

59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.

60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.

61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.

62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.

63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.

64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.

65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.

66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.

67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.

68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.

69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.

70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.

71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.

72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.

73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.

74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.

75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.

76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.

77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).

78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.

79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.

80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.

81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.

82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.

83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.

85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.

86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.

87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.

88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.

89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.

90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.

91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.

92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.

93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.

94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.

95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.

96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.

97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.

98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.

99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.

100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.

101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.

102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.

103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.

104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.

105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.

106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.

107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.

110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.

111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.

112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.

113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.

114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.

115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.

116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.

117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.

119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.

120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.

121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.

122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.

123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.

124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.

125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.

126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.

127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.

128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.

129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.

130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.

133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.

134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.

135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.

136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.

137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.

140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.

141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.

142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.

143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.

144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.

145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.

146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.

147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.

148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.

149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.

150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.

151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.

152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.

153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.

154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.

155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.

156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.

157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.

158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.

159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.

160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.

161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.

162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.

163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.

164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.

165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.

166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.

167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.

168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.

170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.

171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.

172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.

173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.

174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.

175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.

176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.

177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.

178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.

179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.

180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.

181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.

183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.

184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.

185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.

186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.

187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.

188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.

189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.

190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.

191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.

192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.

193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.

195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.

196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.

198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.

199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.

200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.

201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.

202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.

203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.

204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.

205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.

206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.

207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.

208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.

210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.

211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.

212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.

214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.

215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.

216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.

218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.

219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.

220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.

221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.

222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.

223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.

224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.

225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.

226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.

227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.

228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.

229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.

230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).

231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.

232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.

233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.

235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.

236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.

237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.

238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.

239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.

240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.

241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.

242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.

243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.

244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).

245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.

246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.

247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.

248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.

249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.

250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.

251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.

252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.

253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.

254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.

255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.

256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.

257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.

258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.

259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.

260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.

261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.

262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.

263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.

264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.

265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.

266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.

267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.

268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.

269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.

270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.

271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.

272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.

273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.

274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.

275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.

276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.

277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.

278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.

279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.

280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.

281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.

282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.

283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.

284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.

285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.

286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.

287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.

288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.

289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.

290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.

291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.

292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.

293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.

294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.

295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.

296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.

297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.

298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.

299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.

300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.

301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.

302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.

303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.

304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.

305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.

306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.

307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.

308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.

309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.

310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.

311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.

312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.

313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.

314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.

315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.

316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.

317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.

318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.

319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.

320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.

321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.

322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.

323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.

324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.

325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.

326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.

327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.

328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.

330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.

331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.

332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.

335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.

336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.

337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.

338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.

339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).

340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).

341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.

342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.

344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).

345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.

346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.

347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.

348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.

349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.

350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.

353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.

354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.

355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.

356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.

357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.

358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.

359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.

360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.

362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).

365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.

366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.

367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.

368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.

369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.

371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.

372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.

373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.

374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.

375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.

376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.

377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.

379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.

380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.

381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.

383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.

384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.

385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.

386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.

387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.

390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.

391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.

392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.

394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.

395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).

396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.

397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.

399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.

401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.

402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.

403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.

404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.

405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.

406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.

407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.

409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).

410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.

411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.

412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.

414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.

415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.

416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.

417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.

418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.

419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.

420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.

421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.

422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.

423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.

424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.

425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.

426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).

427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.

428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.

429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.

430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.

432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.

433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.

434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.

435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.

436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.

437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.

438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.

439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.

440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.

441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).

442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.

443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.

444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.

445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.

446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.

447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.

449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.

450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.

451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.

455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.

457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.

458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.

459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.

460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.

461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.

462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.

463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.

464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.

465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.

466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.

467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.

468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.

469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.

470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.

471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.

473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.

474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.

475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.

476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.

477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.

478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.

479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.

480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.

481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.

482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.

483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.

484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.

485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.

486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.

487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).

488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.

489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.

490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.

491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.

492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.

493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.

494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.

495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.

496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.

498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.

499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.

501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.

502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.

503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.

504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.

505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.

506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.

507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.

508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.

510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.

511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.

512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.

514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.

516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.

517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.

518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.

519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.

521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.

522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.

524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.

525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.

526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.

527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.

529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.

530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.

531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.

532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.

533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.

534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.

535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.

536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.

538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.

539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.

540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.

541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.

544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.

545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.

546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.

548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.

549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.

550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.

551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.

552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.

553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.

554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.

555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.

556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.

558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.

560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.

561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.

562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.

564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.

565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.

566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.

567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.

568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.

569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.

570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.

571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.

572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.

573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.

576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.

577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.

578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.

579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.

580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.

581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.

582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.

585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.

586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.

587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.

589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.

590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.

591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.

592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.

593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.

595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.

596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.

597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.

598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.

599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.

600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.

601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.

602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.

604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.

606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).

608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.

609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.

610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.

612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.

613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.

614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.

615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.

617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.

618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.

619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.

621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.

622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.

623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.

624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.

626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.

627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.

628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.

629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.

631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.

633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.

634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.

635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.

636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.

637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.

638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.

639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.

640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.

641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.

642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.

644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.

645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.

646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.

647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.

648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.

649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.

650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.

652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.

653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.

654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.

655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.

656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.

657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.

658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.

659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.

660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.

661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.

662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.

663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.

664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.

665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.

666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.

667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.

668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.

669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.

670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.

671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.

672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.

673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.

674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.

675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.

676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.

677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.

678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.

679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.

681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.

682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.

684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.

685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.

686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.

687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.

688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.

690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.

691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.

692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.

693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.

695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.

696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.

697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.

698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.

699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.

700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.

702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.

703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.

704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).

705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.

706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.

707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.

708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.

709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.

710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.

711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.

712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.

713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.

714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.

715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.

716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.

717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.

718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.

719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.

721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.

722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.

723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.

724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.

725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.

726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.

727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.

728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.

729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.

730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.

731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).

733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.

734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.

735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.

736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.

737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.

738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.

739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.

740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.

741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.

742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.

743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.

744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.

745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.

746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.

747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.

748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.

750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.

751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.

752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.

753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.

754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.

755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.

756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.

757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.

759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.

760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.

762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.

763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.

764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.

765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.

766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.

768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.

769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.

770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.

771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.

772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.

773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.

774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.

775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.

776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.

777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.

778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.

779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.

780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.

781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.

782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.

783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.

784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.

785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.

787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.

788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.

789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.

790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.

791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.

792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.

793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.

794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.

795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.

796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.

797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.

798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.

799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.

800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.

801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.

802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.

803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.

806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.

807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.

808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.

809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.

810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.

811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.

812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.

813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.

814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.

815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.

816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.

817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.

818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.

819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.

820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).

821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.

822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.

825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.

826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.

828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.

829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.

830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.

831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.

832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.

833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.

834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.

835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.

836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.

837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.

838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.

839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.

840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.

841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.

842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.

843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.

844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.

845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.

846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.

847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.

848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.

849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).

850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.

852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.

853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.

854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.

855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).

856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.

857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.

858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.

861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.

862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).

864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.

865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.

866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.

867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.

868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.

869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.

870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.

871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.

872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.

873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.

874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.

875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.

876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.

877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.

878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.

879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.

880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.

881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.

882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.

884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.

885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).

886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.

887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.

888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).

889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.

891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.

892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.

894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.

895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.

898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.

899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.

900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.

901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.

902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.

903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.

904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.

905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.

Словарь психоаналитических терминов и понятий > БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

Between the Devil and the Deep Blue Sea — is an idiom meaning a dilemma i.e., to choose between two undesirable situations (equivalent to between a rock and a hard place ). Its original meaning may be that of a nautical reference citing the deep blue sea and a devil a seam (where two… … Wikipedia
talk between ships. — See TBS. * * * … Universalium
talk between ships. — See TBS … Useful english dictionary
Ships of the People's Liberation Army Navy — The ships of the People s Liberation Army Navy number over a hundred combatant ships, organized into three fleets: the North Sea Fleet, the East Sea Fleet, and the South Sea Fleet. The People s Liberation Army Navy (PLAN) is the naval branch of… … Wikipedia
SHIPS AND SAILING — Biblical Period The first sailing vessel mentioned in the Bible is Noah s Ark (see ark of noah ). The Phoenicians first developed marine navigation for purposes of commerce and communication along the sheltered part of the east Mediterranean… … Encyclopedia of Judaism
Ships Built in the Shipyards of El Ferrol between 1750 and 1909 — Wooden, Iron and Steel Ships built in the Shipyards of the Naval Station of El Ferrol, in North western Spain, between 1750 and 1909. [ Between the years 1808 and 1825, coinciding with the emancipation of the Spanish Colonies in America, and the… … Wikipedia
Between Planets — Infobox Book name = Between Planets title orig = translator = image caption = First Edition cover for Between Planets author = Robert A. Heinlein illustrator = cover artist = Clifford Geary country = United States language = English series =… … Wikipedia
Between decks — Deck Deck, n. [D. dek. See {Deck}, v.] 1. The floorlike covering of the horizontal sections, or compartments, of a ship. Small vessels have only one deck; larger ships have two or three decks. [1913 Webster] Note: The following are the more… … The Collaborative International Dictionary of English
Technology and ships of the Seikai Series — This article describes the fictional technology and space ships from the science fiction anime series Crest of the Stars and Banner of the Stars . Technology Anti Matter Also referred to as Anti substance in the anime series, Anti matter is the… … Wikipedia
Indian indenture ships to Fiji — Between 1879 and 1916, a total of 42 ships made 87 voyages, carrying Indian indentured labourers to Fiji. Initially the ships brought labourers from Calcutta, but from 1903 all ships except two also brought labourers from Madras. A total of… … Wikipedia
Red seal ships — For the RCA or RCA Victor record series, see RCA Red Seal Records Red seal ships (朱印船 Shuinsen ) were Japanese armed merchant sailing ships bound for Southeast Asian ports with a red sealed patent issued by the early Tokugawa shogunate in the… … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

(between+ships)

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

(between+ships)

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: